Contents

Canon varioPRINT 6220 Operation Guide PDF

1 of 354
1 of 354

Summary of Content for Canon varioPRINT 6220 Operation Guide PDF

VarioPrint 6000 line

Operation guide VarioPrint 6180, 6220, 6270, 6330

2020 Canon Production Printing

Copyright and Trademarks Copyright

Copyright 2020 Canon Production Printing.

No part of this publication may be copied, modified, reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, manual or otherwise, without the prior written permission of Canon Production Printing. Illustrations and printer output images are simulated and do not necessarily apply to products and services offered in each local market. The content of this publication should neither be construed as any guarantee or warranty with regard to specific properties or specifications nor of technical performance or suitability for particular applications. The content of this publication may be subject to changes from time to time without notice.

CANON PRODUCTION PRINTING SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY NATURE, OR LOSSES OR EXPENSES RESULTING FROM THE USE OF THE CONTENTS OF THIS PUBLICATION.

Language

Translation of the original instructions that are in British English.

Trademarks

Canon is a registered trademark of Canon Inc. PRISMA, PRISMAprepare, SRA, VarioPrint are trademarks or registered trademarks of Canon Production Printing Netherlands B.V.

Adobe, PostScript, and the Adobe logos are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.

Microsoft, Windows, Excel are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corp. incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.

All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners and hereby acknowledged.

Edition 2020-03

Software version 8.3 US

Contents

Chapter 1 Introduction.........................................................................................................................9

Notes for the reader....................................................................................................................................... 10 Users of the print system...............................................................................................................................12 Information in this operation guide.............................................................................................................. 13

Chapter 2 Explore the print system..................................................................................................15

Introduction to the VarioPrint 6000 line........................................................................................................16 Introduction to the main system components.............................................................................................17 The paper modules........................................................................................................................................ 19 The output locations...................................................................................................................................... 21 Optional finishers and other devices............................................................................................................ 23

Form Assist Module.................................................................................................................................23 EasyLift......................................................................................................................................................24 7" x 10" Statement Size Support.............................................................................................................25 Dual paper tray.........................................................................................................................................27 Flex-XL paper input module ...................................................................................................................29 Integrated camera mounting unit ICMU................................................................................................ 30

Chapter 3 Explore the ease of operation..........................................................................................31

What the print system can do for you.......................................................................................................... 32 Control panel.................................................................................................................................................. 33 Settings Editor................................................................................................................................................ 36 PRISMAsync Remote Manager..................................................................................................................... 38 PRISMAsync Remote Match..........................................................................................................................40 Media-based workflow...................................................................................................................................42 Learn about the document printing workflow............................................................................................. 43 Transaction printing workflow...................................................................................................................... 44

Chapter 4 Start the print system...................................................................................................... 47

The power buttons and power modes......................................................................................................... 48 Turn on the system........................................................................................................................................ 50 Shut down the system................................................................................................................................... 51 Restart the system..........................................................................................................................................52 Log in, log out, and change passwords........................................................................................................53

Log in to the printer................................................................................................................................. 53 Log out or switch roles............................................................................................................................ 57 Change password.................................................................................................................................... 59 Recover password....................................................................................................................................61

Chapter 5 Prepare the print system..................................................................................................63

Adjust the control panel.................................................................................................................................64 Define the handling of media attributes in JDF ticket................................................................................. 67 Work with workflow profiles......................................................................................................................... 68

Contents

3 VarioPrint 6000 line

Eject the stack after the system is idle for a certain time............................................................................73 Reprint the set after an error......................................................................................................................... 74 Work with automated workflows.................................................................................................................. 75

Learn about automated workflows.........................................................................................................75 Define a new automated workflow.........................................................................................................77 Define the attributes of an automated workflow...................................................................................78 Restore the default automated workflow...............................................................................................82 Apply an automated workflow in job destination................................................................................. 83 Submit jobs via LPR.................................................................................................................................85

Use hotfolders................................................................................................................................................ 86 Introduction to hotfolders....................................................................................................................... 86 Configure hotfolders................................................................................................................................87 Submit jobs via hotfolders...................................................................................................................... 89

Accounting...................................................................................................................................................... 91 General Information.................................................................................................................................91

The basics of accounting.................................................................................................................. 91 The accounting related settings in the Settings Editor.................................................................. 92

The Account Log File............................................................................................................................... 93 The Account Log File.........................................................................................................................93 Download an account log file.........................................................................................................100

Chapter 6 Prepare the print jobs.....................................................................................................101

Where to define print job settings.............................................................................................................. 102 Prepare print jobs with Remote Printer Driver...........................................................................................104 Print a job using PRISMAprepare (option)................................................................................................. 105 Drag & drop print files on hotfolders..........................................................................................................106 Print a file from a USB drive........................................................................................................................107 Print a page number via PRISMAsync........................................................................................................109

Chapter 7 Plan the workload remotely.......................................................................................... 111

PRISMAsync Remote Manager (optional)..................................................................................................112 Use the Remote Control app to monitor printing......................................................................................113

Chapter 8 Plan the jobs....................................................................................................................115

Manage the jobs in the queue.....................................................................................................................116 Learn about job management in the queues.......................................................................................116 Search, filter and select jobs................................................................................................................. 120 Move jobs to another destination.........................................................................................................123 Schedule a Waiting Job for Printing.................................................................................................... 128 Print an Urgent Job Immediately......................................................................................................... 129 Give Priority to a Print Job.................................................................................................................... 130 Print a scheduled job later.....................................................................................................................131 Combine jobs in the list of [Waiting jobs] (bundle function)............................................................. 132 Define default use of special pages......................................................................................................134 Create a note for the operator...............................................................................................................138

Use the DocBox (Option)............................................................................................................................. 140 The DocBox function............................................................................................................................. 140

Introduction to the DocBox Function............................................................................................. 140 Create a New DocBox......................................................................................................................142

Handle the Jobs in a DocBox................................................................................................................ 143 Overview of the Available Settings for DocBox Jobs...................................................................143 Edit a Job in a DocBox.................................................................................................................... 157 Combine Jobs in a DocBox (Build Function).................................................................................158 Split a Combined Job in the DocBox.............................................................................................159 Lock a job in a DocBox....................................................................................................................160

Contents

4 VarioPrint 6000 line

Unlock a Job in a DocBox...............................................................................................................161 Move a Job from One DocBox to Another DocBox......................................................................162

Print the Jobs in a DocBox.................................................................................................................... 163 Print a Non-Urgent Job from the DocBox..................................................................................... 163 Print an Urgent Job from the DocBox Immediately..................................................................... 164

Chapter 9 Carry out print jobs.........................................................................................................165

Change the print job settings on the control panel................................................................................... 166 Description of the print job settings that you can change on the control panel.............................. 166 Change the output settings................................................................................................................... 181

Change 2-sided into 1-sided and vice versa..................................................................................181 Change the binding edge................................................................................................................182 Select another media for a job....................................................................................................... 183 Change the settings for covers.......................................................................................................184 Shift the image roughly to create binding space..........................................................................185 Shift the image precisely to create binding space or correct the layout.................................... 186 Change the Print Delivery Settings................................................................................................ 187 Change the stacking method per job.............................................................................................190 Change the print quality settings................................................................................................... 191 Define the finishing for print jobs.................................................................................................. 193

Change the job settings.........................................................................................................................194 Change the number of sets.............................................................................................................194 Check the first set............................................................................................................................ 195 Change the page range you want to print.....................................................................................196 Rename a job................................................................................................................................... 197 Change the use of separator sheets...............................................................................................198

Print your jobs using the control panel...................................................................................................... 199 Reprint a job........................................................................................................................................... 199 Select more than one job for printing.................................................................................................. 200 Print a job ticket......................................................................................................................................201 Make a proof...........................................................................................................................................202 Stop the printer...................................................................................................................................... 203 Duplicate jobs.........................................................................................................................................205 Delete print jobs..................................................................................................................................... 206

Variable data printing...................................................................................................................................207 Variable data printing............................................................................................................................ 207 Convert a job to a variable data job..................................................................................................... 208

The Transaction section (optional)............................................................................................................. 210 Introduction to the transaction section ............................................................................................... 210 Activate transaction printing.................................................................................................................213 Deactivate transaction printing.............................................................................................................214 Shift the image in the transaction printing mode............................................................................... 215 Print in transaction printing mode........................................................................................................216 Transaction setups.................................................................................................................................218

Create a new transaction setup......................................................................................................218 Edit a transaction setup...................................................................................................................219 Activate a transaction setup........................................................................................................... 220 Import, export, or restore transaction setups............................................................................... 221 Validate a transaction setup........................................................................................................... 222 Validate all transaction setups........................................................................................................223

IPDS.........................................................................................................................................................224 Media information (IPDS)............................................................................................................... 224 Output recovery in case of an error (IPDS)....................................................................................225

PCL.......................................................................................................................................................... 228 Media messages (PCL)....................................................................................................................228 Handle the media messages in the tray-to-media mode (PCL)................................................... 229 Handle the media messages in the tray-to-tray mode (PCL)....................................................... 230

Make an intermediate check print...............................................................................................................231

Contents

5 VarioPrint 6000 line

Chapter 10 Keep the system printing...............................................................................................233

Use the Schedule..........................................................................................................................................234 Introduction to the [Schedule] view..................................................................................................... 234 Load media via the [Schedule] view.................................................................................................... 237

The dashboard..............................................................................................................................................239 The operator attention light.........................................................................................................................241 Status indicators...........................................................................................................................................242

Chapter 11 Media handling............................................................................................................... 247

Introduction...................................................................................................................................................248 Introduction to the media handling......................................................................................................248 Introduction to the Trays view.............................................................................................................. 249 Introduction to the [Media] section...................................................................................................... 252

Media related actions...................................................................................................................................255 Load the media.......................................................................................................................................255 Assign the media to a paper tray - Load and assign the media to a paper tray...............................256

Assign the media to a paper tray - Change the currently assigned media type........................ 256 Add media to the media catalog...........................................................................................................257 Add temporary media to the [Media catalog]..................................................................................... 258 Media indicators Black & White............................................................................................................259 Change the advanced media settings.................................................................................................. 260

Change the advanced media settings - Enable the [Low temperature mode]........................... 261 Change the advanced media settings - Disable the double-sheet detection..............................262 Change the advanced media settings - Enable the enhanced media mode...............................263 Change the advanced media settings - Change the [Paper quality]........................................... 264 Change the advanced media settings - Start the [Paper quality test]......................................... 265

Perform a media registration for standard-size media - Print the test sheets and create the ruler...... 266 Perform a media registration for standard-size media - Adjust the Z-position of side 1.................267 Perform a media registration for standard-size media - Adjust the X-length of side 1................... 269 Perform a media registration for standard-size media - Adjust the Z-position of side 2.................270 Perform a media registration for standard-size media - Adjust the X-position of side 1................ 271 Perform a media registration for standard-size media - Adjust the X-position of side 2................ 272

Perform a media registration for large media - Print the test sheets and create the ruler.................... 273 Perform a media registration for large media - Adjust the Z-position of side 1...............................274 Perform a media registration for large media - Adjust the X-length of side 1................................. 276 Perform a media registration for large media - Adjust the Z-position of side 2...............................277 Perform a media registration for large media - Adjust the X-position of side 1.............................. 278 Perform a media registration for large media - Adjust the X-position of side 2.............................. 279

Light-weight media...................................................................................................................................... 280 Load light-weight media into the paper module.................................................................................281 Unpack light-weight media................................................................................................................... 285 Determine the grain direction of light-weight media..........................................................................287

Chapter 12 Maintain the print system..............................................................................................289

System configuration...................................................................................................................................290 System configuration and maintenance.............................................................................................. 290 Change a number of settings in the Settings Editor via the control panel....................................... 292 Introduction to the [Setup] section.......................................................................................................296

Backup and restore.......................................................................................................................................298 Counters........................................................................................................................................................ 299

Introduction to the [Maintenance] section...........................................................................................299 Introduction to the counters..................................................................................................................301 Reset the day counters.......................................................................................................................... 302 Print the Billing Counters Report.......................................................................................................... 303

Contents

6 VarioPrint 6000 line

Software updates......................................................................................................................................... 304 Remote Service (ORS) (optional)................................................................................................................ 305

Remote Service...................................................................................................................................... 305 Keeping the printer running........................................................................................................................ 307

Introduction to the [Printer] section..................................................................................................... 307 Check the status of the toner reservoirs.............................................................................................. 308 Add toner................................................................................................................................................ 309 Check the status of the staple cartridges............................................................................................. 310 Finisher: Add staples............................................................................................................................. 311

Get access to the staplers............................................................................................................... 311 Add staples.......................................................................................................................................312 Close the doors and covers............................................................................................................ 315

Chapter 13 PRISMAlytics Dashboard .............................................................................................. 317

Chapter 14 Troubleshooting..............................................................................................................319

Troubleshooting........................................................................................................................................... 320 Troubleshooting for light-weight media.....................................................................................................323 Store the logging in case of software errors..............................................................................................327 Create and download a log file................................................................................................................... 328

Chapter 15 Specifications..................................................................................................................335

Product specifications.................................................................................................................................. 336 Environmental.............................................................................................................................................. 338 Print speed ................................................................................................................................................... 339 PRISMAsync controller specifications........................................................................................................ 340 Printer driver support...................................................................................................................................342

Index.................................................................................................................................343

Contents

7 VarioPrint 6000 line

Contents

8 VarioPrint 6000 line

Chapter 1 Introduction

Notes for the reader

Typography

This manual uses the following typography to indicate elements that are part of the user interface.

Typography Indicates

[Text between square brackets] Name of a button, tile, setting, value, or other option of the user interface

Name of a key on a keyboard Name of a variable: item that varies accord-

ing to the context

Text displayed in courier font File path Command Prompt comment

[Text] [displayed in] [menucascade] Names of options to be used in a fixed order

Safety symbols

Before you use this product, make sure you read and understand the safety information that belongs to the product. Find the safety information on "http://downloads.cpp.canon". Also be sure to follow all warnings and instructions marked on the product.

This manual uses the following safety symbols to indicate hazards and precautions.

Symbol Type of symbol Indicates

WARNING Indicates a warning concerning operations that may lead to death or injury to persons if not performed correctly. To use the machine safely, always pay attention to these warnings.

CAUTION Indicates a caution concerning operations that may lead to in- jury to persons if not performed correctly. To use the ma- chine safely, always pay attention to these cautions. This indication can concern hazards that have a specific CAU- TION symbol. The 'hot surface', 'electric shock', 'moving parts' and 'laser beam' cautions are listed below.

CAUTION Hot surface Indicates a caution concerning operations that may lead to in- jury to persons if not performed correctly. To use the ma- chine safely, always pay attention to these cautions.

CAUTION Electric shock Indicates a caution concerning operations that may lead to in- jury to persons if not performed correctly. To use the ma- chine safely, always pay attention to these cautions.

CAUTION Moving parts Indicates a caution concerning operations that may lead to in- jury to persons if not performed correctly. To use the ma- chine safely, always pay attention to these cautions. 4

Notes for the reader

10 Chapter 1 - Introduction VarioPrint 6000 line

Symbol Type of symbol Indicates

CAUTION Laser beam Indicates a caution concerning operations that may lead to in- jury to persons if not performed correctly. To use the ma- chine safely, always pay attention to these cautions.

IMPORTANT Indicates an operational requirement or restriction. Read these items carefully in order to prevent damage to equip- ment, software, data, media, or property.

NOTE Indicates a clarification of an operation or contains additional explanations for a procedure. Reading these notes is highly recommended.

Body protection symbols

This manual uses the following body protection symbols to indicate that it is important to protect yourself before performing a specific task or action.

Symbol Type of symbol Indicates

IMPORTANT Hand protection Wear the mentioned type of gloves when you perform this task or action.

IMPORTANT Eye protection Use the mentioned type of eye protection when you perform this task or action.

IMPORTANT Body protection Wear the mentioned type of body protection when you per- form this task or action.

IMPORTANT Foot protection Wear the mentioned type of safety footwear when you per- form this task or action.

Notes for the reader

Chapter 1 - Introduction 11 VarioPrint 6000 line

Users of the print system Print environments where the VarioPrint 6000 line is installed differ in many aspects. Therefore, it is difficult to describe general roles that are applicable to each situation. The VarioPrint 6000 line has default user accounts that are related to the access of password-protected functionality or settings. However, the default user groups can be adjusted by the system administrator according to the number or type of users in your organization.

The tasks related to specific phases of the job workflow give a more uniform picture. Most print environments split tasks between job preparation, job planning, print production, printer maintenance, and printer configuration. Because of complexity of media definitions, many print environments have experts on these areas as well.

Below you find five different roles that are used in this operation guide. The tasks of the expert focus on how to translate media requirements of customers into

system and job settings. The tasks of the prepress focus on the translation of specific customer requests into job

settings. They can work with PRISMAprepare or PRISMAproduction to prepare documents or data for printing. When ready the documents are submitted to the printer.

The tasks of the operators focus on job planning, job editing, the print production, and printer maintenance.

The tasks of the key operators focus on workflow settings and job defaults. The tasks of the system administrators focus on the user authentication, data security, and

connection to other systems and servers.

Aimgroup of this operation guide

This operation guide is developed to support experts, operators, and key operators.

Users of the print system

12 Chapter 1 - Introduction VarioPrint 6000 line

Information in this operation guide

Contents of this guide

Read this operation guide to learn what the VarioPrint 6000 line product can do for you, how to operate and maintain the print system, and how to use it in a safe way.

The guide starts with basic information on the print system (Chapter 2). The ease of operation and the highlights of PRISMAsync are part of Chapter 3.

In the next chapters you find the instructions how to start up the print system and prepare the print system (Chapter 4 and 5). For several tasks in these chapters you need to have access to configuration tasks.

Next the guide describes how you can prepare print jobs for operators (Chapter 6).

Then, the guide describes how you can plan and monitor the workload of jobs remotely (Chapter 7). For the tasks in this chapter you need to have access to the remote tools.

The way you can plan the jobs from the control panel is described in Chapter 8.

How to carry out print jobs is in the next chapter (Chapter 9).

Chapter 10 informs you how to keep the system printing.

Carefully read the media handling instructions of chapter 11. This chapter contains also a section about how to use light-weight media.

Maintenance instructions teach you how to keep the print system running (Chapter 12).

Chapter 13 informs you about the PRISMAlytics Dashboard.

Chapter 14 has information about the solving of problems.

Chapter 15 gives the specifications about your product.

Optionals described in this operation guide

This user guide includes the description of the following optionals: Form assist module Easy lift 7" x 10" statement size support Dual paper tray Flex-XL paper input module Integrated camera mounting unit ICMU

The other hardware optionals have an operation guide that is delivered together with the product.

Other product information

On the downloads site downloads.cpp.canon you can find all product information for the VarioPrint 6000 line, among others: This operation guide Safety guide for print system Maintenance guide Extended key operator maintenance guide PRISMAsync Print Server administration guide PRISMAsync Remote Control quick reference guide PRISMAlytics Dashboard quick reference guide PRISMAsync Remote Match user guide Technical reference manual

Information in this operation guide

Chapter 1 - Introduction 13 VarioPrint 6000 line

Information in this operation guide

14 Chapter 1 - Introduction VarioPrint 6000 line

Chapter 2 Explore the print system

Introduction to the VarioPrint 6000 line

Introduction

The VarioPrint 6000 line is a series of high-volume, cut-sheet printers. The printers are intended both for document printing and stream printing.

The key feature of the machine is the Gemini Instant Duplex Technology. This technology enables the machine to print the front side and back side of a sheet at the same time. Depending on your version, the sustained print speed, including reconditioning, ranges from 182 to 221 to 272 to 328 images per minute when you print a 2-sided A4 document. For a 2-sided Letter document the sustained print speed ranges from 177 to 216 to 266 to 320 images per minute.

The print speed for 1-sided A4 documents ranges from 127 images per minute to 164 images per minute. For 1-sided Letter documents the print speed ranges from 124 images per minute to 160 images per minute.

This section provides a short description of the main features of the printer.

Overview of the main features

Gemini Instant Duplex Technology that enables the printing of both sides of a sheet at the same time.

Advanced scheduling concept on the control panel to keep the machine running. Load and assign the media while the printer prints. Unload the media while the printer prints. Assign the media while the printer warms up, after the printer is initialized. Support of up to 12 paper trays (total input capacity up to 13,800 sheets) and a roll feeder. Support of up to 3 stackers, a finisher and other external finishers. Support of a large range of media, media sizes and media weights.

Support of light-weight media with the optional light-weight media module. Support of APPE 5.4 (Adobe PDF Print Engine), PS/PCL/PDF and streaming PS. Support of TP (IPDS, PCL/PJL) Support of a large range of software products, for example the PRISMA series, Xerox

FreeFlow . Support of RDO files via DP Link.

Introduction to the VarioPrint 6000 line

16 Chapter 2 - Explore the print system VarioPrint 6000 line

Introduction to the main system components

Introduction

The following illustrations show the main system components. The table describes the main components. Please follow the links in the table for comprehensive information.

The main system components

Component Function

1 Control panel The control panel helps you with your daily work, for ex- ample the scheduling of the jobs. Furthermore, the con- trol panel helps you to solve errors or perform mainte- nance tasks (see Control panel on page 33).

2 Operator attention light

The operator attention light enables you to check the status of the system from a distance (see The operator attention light on page 241). 4

Introduction to the main system components

Chapter 2 - Explore the print system 17 VarioPrint 6000 line

Component Function

3 Paper module The paper module contains 4 paper trays. The paper trays contain the media that will be printed. The default configuration of the system contains 1 paper module. You can add 1 or 2 more paper modules to the default configuration to increase the media input capacity (see The paper modules on page 19).

4 Engine module The engine module contains the components that print the media. Access to the engine module is only required when a paper jam occurs or when maintenance is re- quired. The doors at the left-hand side and right-hand side of the engine module give access to the toner units.

5 Stacker The stacker is the output location of a default configura- tion. The system supports up to 3 stackers (see The out- put locations on page 21).

6 Finisher (optional) The finisher on top of the stacker is an optional output location for the print jobs. The finisher can staple the jobs (see The output locations on page 21).

7 Roll feeder (optional) A roll feeder is an optional device that adds paper input capacity to your printer. When you use a roll feeder, you can only use 1 or 2 paper modules. A combination of 3 paper modules and a roll feeder is not possible. The con- trol panel displays the roll feeder and gives feedback about the status of the roll feeder. For example whether the roll is full or empty. Please refer to the documenta- tion of the roll feeder manufacturer for more informa- tion, for example about replacing an empty roll.

Introduction to the main system components

18 Chapter 2 - Explore the print system VarioPrint 6000 line

The paper modules

Introduction

The paper trays contain the media that are required for the print jobs. The default configuration of the machine contains 1 paper module with 4 paper trays. Two standard trays with a capacity of 600 sheets each. Two bulk trays with a capacity of 1,700 sheets each (or 3,400 A4/Letter sheets each when the

optional dual paper trays are installed)

Contact your local authorized dealer for more information about the dual paper trays.

You can add 1 or 2 more paper modules to the machine. Then the total number of paper trays is extended to 8 or 12 respectively. You can find more information about the capacities of the paper trays and the supported media size in the specification chapter of this manual.

You can also install a Flex-XL PIM paper input module. In this paper module the two bulk trays are replaced by Flex-XL trays. A Flex-XL tray can contain media until media size 350 mm x 500 mm. You can install the Flex-XL PIM instead of a standard paper module or in combination with a standard paper module. You can install a maximum of 3 paper modules. Contact your local authorized dealer for more information about the Flex-XL PIM. See also Flex-XL paper input module on page 29.

This section describes the control panel on each paper module.

NOTE You can use the control panel on the paper modules to open the paper trays and load the media. However, the recommended way to open the paper trays and assign the media is via the [Schedule] view. You can also open the paper trays and/or assign the media via the [Trays] view (see Assign the media to a paper tray on page 256).

The control panel

1

2

3

4

2 4

3

5

1

[1] The control panel on the paper modules

Each paper module contains a control panel next to the upper paper tray. The control panel consists of 4 sections that correspond with the 4 paper trays. Each section displays the current filling level of the corresponding paper tray. Furthermore, the control panel indicates whether the media in the paper tray is assigned or not. The following table describes the various parts of the control panel.

The paper modules

Chapter 2 - Explore the print system 19 VarioPrint 6000 line

The parts of the control panel

Number Description

1 The LEDs indicate the current amount of sheets in the corresponding paper tray. Each lit-up LED indicates the presence of about 100 sheets (based on media of 80 g/m2 or 20 lb bond).

2 Press the button to open the corresponding paper tray. You can only open 1 paper tray at a time.

3 When the check mark is green, the media in the paper tray is defined. The system knows which media is in the paper tray.

4 When the arrows are red, the media in the paper tray is not defined. The system does not know which media is in the paper tray. The [Trays] view on the control panel indicates that no media is assigned to the paper tray.

5 The [Not assigned] button. This button applies to the paper tray where you just put the media. You can press the [Not assigned] button when you load a new media type into a paper tray without defining this media type on the control panel first. Then the printer cannot accidentally use the media in this paper tray before the media is correctly defined on the control panel. You can define the me- dia type in the [Trays] view on the control panel later (see Assign the media to a paper tray on page 256).

NOTE Make sure that the paper tray is open when you press the [Not as- signed] button.

The paper modules

20 Chapter 2 - Explore the print system VarioPrint 6000 line

The output locations

Introduction

The machine supports several output locations for the printed jobs. The default configuration of your machine contains a stacker and the system output. The finisher is an optional output location. Furthermore, you can connect several optional external finishers to the machine.

NOTE You need the optional finisher or another optional external finisher to staple the jobs.

[2] The output locations

Overview of the output locations

Component Description

1 [Stacker] The stacker is the default output location of the machine. The stacker capacity is 6,000 sheets, in 2 stacks of 3,000 sheets each (80 g/m or 20 lb. bond). The stacker does not contain staple cartridges. Therefore, the stacker cannot be the output location for jobs that require staples.

2 [System output] The system output is the output location for the following prints. Error prints Sample prints Configuration reports Job tickets The test sheets for the media registration. The test sheets for the media quality.

Make sure that you regularly remove the sheets from the system out- put. 4

The output locations

Chapter 2 - Explore the print system 21 VarioPrint 6000 line

Component Description

3 [Finisher] (op- tional)

The optional finisher contains the following output trays. 3 output trays 1 upper output (see no. 4 below)

The finisher contains 2 staple cartridges to staple the jobs. The 3 output trays can receive A4, Letter and similar media sizes. Stapled jobs (A4, Letter and similar media sizes only) go into the output trays. The total capacity of the output trays is 3,700 sheets (80 g/m or 20 lb bond).

NOTE The output trays cannot receive tab sheets.

4 [Finisher upper output]

The finisher upper output is part of the finisher. The upper output can receive all formats. However, the upper output is mainly intended for large media or jobs with mixed size media. The maximum capacity of the upper output is 500 sheets (80 g/m or 20 lb bond).

NOTE The upper output does not contain staple cartridges. There- fore, the upper output cannot be the output location for jobs that require staples.

The output locations

22 Chapter 2 - Explore the print system VarioPrint 6000 line

Optional finishers and other devices

Form Assist Module

Introduction

The printer allows you to print on special media with irregular thickness. Examples of such media are media with glued-on (membership or bank) passes, folded media, or media with a slip attached. When you load a stack of special media with irregular thickness into the paper tray, the stack will tilt. When the stack tilts too much, it may cause paper jams. Therefore, you can only load a limited amount of special media with irregular thickness into the paper tray.

The Form Assist Module is a device you can insert in your bulk paper tray without modifying your paper tray. It allows you to increase the media input capacity. When you use the Form Assist Module, your stack of special media will stay straight. This allows you to load more media into the paper tray and to increase your productivity. The Form Assist Module is delivered with 'Installation instructions'.

IMPORTANT The variety of special media makes it difficult to predict whether the printer can process the special media you want to use. Before you begin, test the special media and print a limited number of sheets.

Paper input capacity

Paper tray with Form Assist Module Paper tray without Form Assist Module

Paper with irregu- lar thickness (num- ber of sheets)

100 - 200 20 - 50

Optional finishers and other devices

Chapter 2 - Explore the print system 23 VarioPrint 6000 line

EasyLift

Introduction

The EasyLift is a device that helps you to lift stacks of paper out of the stacker more easily. The EasyLift is delivered with an 'Information sheet'.

CAUTION The maximum lifting weight is 15 kg / 33 lb. Caution: this is only a guideline, the amount may be lower/higher depending on your physical strength.

CAUTION Avoid physical injury. Bend you knees and keep your back straight when you use the EasyLift.

Maximum weight

The following table gives you an indication of the weight of the most common media you can lift with the EasyLift.

Media Number of sheets / weight in kg/lbs

100 sheets 500 sheets 1000 sheets 2000 sheets

A4 (80 gr) 0.5 kg / 1.1 lbs 2.5 kg / 5.5 lbs 5.0 kg / 11.0 lbs 10.0 kg / 22.0 lbs

A3 (80 gr) 1.0 kg / 2.2 lbs 5.0 kg / 11.0 lbs 10.0 kg / 22 lbs Too heavy!

Letter (20 lbs) 0.5 kg / 1.0 lbs 2.3 kg / 5.0 lbs 4.5 kg / 10.0 lbs 9.1 kg / 20.0 lbs

Legal (20 lbs) 0.6 kg / 1.3 lbs 2.9 kg / 6.4 lbs 5.8 kg / 12.7 lbs 11.6 kg / 25.5 lbs

Ledger (20 lbs) 0.9 kg / 2.0 lbs 4.5 kg / 10.0 lbs 9.1 kg / 20.0 lbs Too heavy!

EasyLift

24 Chapter 2 - Explore the print system VarioPrint 6000 line

7" x 10" Statement Size Support

Introduction

The smallest media size that this machine supports is 203 x 203 mm / 7.9 x 7.9 inch. The 7" x 10" Statement Size Support device enables you to print on media with a size of 7 x 10 inches / 178 x 254 mm and on JIS B5.

You can insert this device in your bulk paper tray without modifying your paper tray. This device is delivered with 'Installation instructions'.

NOTE If you want to print on 7 x 10 inch media or on JIS B5, this media has to be available in the media catalog. If the media catalog does not contain 7 x 10 inch media or JIS B5, you will have to register this media first.

NOTE If you are printing on 7 x 10 inch media or on JIS B5, it is important that the paper tray contain enough media. The dashboard informs you when to load media.

NOTE Remove the device from the paper tray when you want to load other media than the 7 x 10 inch media or JIS B5.

NOTE When you use the 7" x 10" Statement Size Support the dashboard informs you to load media even though there is still a small amount of media present in the paper tray.

How to load the media with the 7" x 10" Statement Size Support

Action Illustration

1 Open the paper tray

2 Flip the metal plates over to the right- hand side.

3 Load the media. 4

7" x 10" Statement Size Support

Chapter 2 - Explore the print system 25 VarioPrint 6000 line

Action Illustration

4 Flip the metal plates over to the left-hand side over the media.

5 Close the paper tray

7" x 10" Statement Size Support

26 Chapter 2 - Explore the print system VarioPrint 6000 line

Dual paper tray

Introduction

The dual paper tray enables you to load 2 stacks of the same media in one paper tray. When the first stack of media becomes empty, the printing stops. The second stack is moved to the left- hand side and printing continues. A dual paper tray replaces a bulk tray.

Contact your local authorized dealer for more information about the dual paper tray.

The dual paper tray in the paper module

You can only load A4/Letter in the dual paper tray. The capacity of the dual paper tray is 3,300 A4/ Letter sheets instead of 1,700 sheets (bulk tray).The capacity of the left-hand stack is 1,800 A4/ Letter sheets. The capacity of the right-hand stack is 1,600 A4/Letter sheets.

The control panel of the paper module is described in The paper modules on page 19.

1

2

3

4

1

Number Description

1 If the LED is lit-up the dual paper tray is installed.

Load the media

See the media handling section for information on how to handle the media.

The [Trays] view displays the following icon for the dual paper tray.

Dual paper tray

Chapter 2 - Explore the print system 27 VarioPrint 6000 line

Icon Description

The left-hand stack of the dual paper tray is partly filled.

NOTE Each line of the left-hand stack indicates the presence of about 100 sheets.

The right-hand stack of the dual paper tray is partially or completely fil- led.

NOTE The right-hand part of the dual paper tray is assumed to be either full (independent of the actual filling level) or empty. Therefore the right-hand part of the icon for the dual paper tray displays full or empty.

NOTE The schedule assumes that the right-hand part of the dual paper tray is either full (although the stack may be partially filled) or empty. When the first stack becomes empty and the second stack is used, the schedule is updated with the actual filling level. You are advised to fill the right-hand stack completely.

Dual paper tray

28 Chapter 2 - Explore the print system VarioPrint 6000 line

Flex-XL paper input module The Flex-XL PIM paper input module is the same as the standard paper module. The only difference is that the two bulk trays are replaced by Flex-XL trays. A Flex-XL tray can contain media until media size 350 mm x 500 mm. The minimum media size 208 mm x 203 mm.

You can install the Flex-XL PIM instead of a standard paper module or in combination with a standard paper module. You can install a maximum of 3 paper modules. The configuration with a Flex-XL PIM does not have to contain a standard paper module.

Flex-XL paper input module

Chapter 2 - Explore the print system 29 VarioPrint 6000 line

Integrated camera mounting unit ICMU The integrated camera mounting unit ICMU is a unit that can contain a camera system. With the camera system you can compare the actual printed sheets with the digital original. When the printed image and the original do not match the print job is aborted.

Interface: the software of the camera system communicates via CCI (copy count interface) with the printer software.

Location: the ICMU is located between the print engine and the HCS.

Integrated camera mounting unit ICMU

30 Chapter 2 - Explore the print system VarioPrint 6000 line

Chapter 3 Explore the ease of operation

What the print system can do for you The VarioPrint 6000 line is an easy-to-use multitasking print system that offers many useful functions.

You can define the same job properties from several locations: in Remote Printer Driver, the control panel, and Remote Manager.

Across the whole print workflow the central media catalog with a wide range of media definitions is available. This ensures first-time-right output.

PRISMAsync supports a structured document printing workflow to make the best use of staff resources and expertise.

The input and finishing optionals support many different media types and finishing options. The print system can staple, fold, trim, crease or punch the printed output in various ways. You can print professional looking, high quality output, such as stapled booklets and books with glued, preprinted covers.

You can use the print system in two modes: document printing and transaction printing.

Remote tools help you to operate the printer from a distance. The web-based PRISMAsync Remote Manager application offers remote workload and job planning across the printer fleet from one central overview. The Remote Control App ensures you stay informed about the print production on your printers.

What the print system can do for you

32 Chapter 3 - Explore the ease of operation VarioPrint 6000 line

Control panel The control panel is the location on the print system to manage print jobs, copy jobs, and scan jobs. The control panel provides you full system control.

The following table describes the main parts of the control panel and their functions.

The main components of the control panel

Component Function

1 Sleep button Put the system into the sleep mode or wake up the system.

2 Stop button Stop the printing process after a set or as soon as possible.

3 Paper tray button Get immediate access to the [Trays] section on the control panel to do the following (for example): Check the content of all paper trays. Load a new media type into a paper tray. Change the media type which is available in one

of the paper trays. Open the front door of the printer.

4 USB port Insert a USB drive into the USB port to print any documents on the USB drive. You can disable the USB port.

5 [Schedule] button (optional) Access the [Schedule] view to manage the jobs in the schedule.

6 [Jobs] button Manage and print the jobs in the lists of [Waiting jobs], [Scheduled jobs] and [Printed jobs], or in a DocBox (optional). 4

Control panel

Chapter 3 - Explore the ease of operation 33 VarioPrint 6000 line

Component Function

7 [Trays] button Access the [Trays] section on the control panel to do the following, for example: Check the content of all paper trays. Load a new media type into a paper tray, or Change the media type which is available in one

of the paper trays.

8 [System] button Access the [System] section to do the following, for example: Check the status of the toner, staples and other

supplies. Get information of the finishers. Read counters. Start maintenance. Set up the preferred workflows. Change a number of default system settings such

as the language. Adjust the brightness and contrast of the LCD

panel. Shut down the printer. View the content of the media catalog or add

(temporary) media to the media catalog.

9 Username The username of the user that is currently logged in. When you want to log in as another user, log out or change your password, use this button.

10 Dashboard The dashboard displays information about the sys- tem status such as: Information about the current printing process. Information about operator intervention that is

required soon. Information about errors. Information about the status of the toner reser-

voir and staple cartridges. 4

Control panel

34 Chapter 3 - Explore the ease of operation VarioPrint 6000 line

Component Function

11 Status LED The status LED displays the status of the system: Red LED

The machine has stopped, for example because a required media type is not available or an error has occurred. Operator attention is required now.

Orange LED The machine will stop soon, for example because more paper is required. Operator attention is re- quired soon. The orange light illuminates when the machine reaches the warning time. The warning time is a time you can set to determine when the orange light must illuminate. You can set the warning time in the [System] view of the control panel.

Green LED The machine is busy printing. The machine can print longer than the set warning time. Operator attention is not required.

LED off The machine is idle. There are no jobs scheduled for printing and no operator attention is required.

Access to the control panel

The access to the control panel can be secured to protect the contents of the documents and print quality settings. When the access to the control panel is secured, you need to log in to the print system.

The system administrator is responsible for user authorization and for providing your credentials.

For more information, see Users of the print system on page 12.

[3] Login screen

[4] Username is displayed at the bottom of the screen

Control panel

Chapter 3 - Explore the ease of operation 35 VarioPrint 6000 line

Settings Editor

Introduction

PRISMAsync offers the web-based Settings Editor to configure the print system according to requirements of the print environment. Part of these settings is also available on the control panel.

The following configuration settings, tooling, and support information are available in the Settings Editor: Media settings, to maintain the media catalog and media families. Default job settings, the print and scan quality, finishing properties, and most print languages

(PDL's). Energy save modes. Default system settings of finishers, o/a high capacity stacker, stacker. Workflow settings, to set up the DocBox folders, SMB shares, fonts, scan profiles, hotfolders

and automated workflows. Transaction printing settings (optional), to define setups, image shifting, tray mapping and

resources. IT and security settings, to establish the connection with servers, to ensure a secure

environment, and to set up the accounting system. Support information, to view contact and counter information, to install licenses, to update

software, to download Remote Printer Driver, to troubleshoot, to generate loggings. Troubleshooting to create and download loggings, to backup and restore the system settings,

to remove jobs.

[5] Settings Editor

Description

1 The settings are grouped in main and sub tabs.

2 Use the search box to quickly find a setting.

3 Use the link to start PRISMAsync Remote Manager.

4 Click the user name to log in to the Settings Editor, log out or change the password. A red exclamation mark indicates that a default password is used. You are advised to change default passwords.

A setting can show an icon to provide more information on the use. The table below explains the icons.

Setting is editable

Setting not editable

4

Settings Editor

36 Chapter 3 - Explore the ease of operation VarioPrint 6000 line

Setting is also available on the control panel

Setting can be changed with key operator or system administrator credentials

How to access the Settings Editor

Make sure you have the following information before you access the Settings Editor. The IP address or host name of the PRISMAsync controller. The required password (key operator password, system administrator password) to make the

required settings.

Procedure

1. Open your web browser. The Settings Editor uses the same language as the web browser.

NOTE When the Settings Editor does not display the correct language, you can change the preferred language in the Internet options of your Internet browser.

2. In the address bar, enter the IP address or host name of the PRISMAsync controller. http:// https:// The Settings Editor application appears. You can now make the required settings.

Settings Editor

Chapter 3 - Explore the ease of operation 37 VarioPrint 6000 line

PRISMAsync Remote Manager

PRISMAsync Remote Manager

PRISMAsync Remote Manager is a multi-printer schedule and remote management console to control PRISMAsync Print Server-driven printers.

This web-based tool helps central operators manage their print production and provide insight into the production schedules.

PRISMAsync Remote Manager enables you to upload jobs, to edit job properties and to change the print queues from a remote location or workstation. Jobs can easily be re-scheduled, re- located, or changed before being printed.

You start the software application in the Settings Editor.

Use the help function or user guide of PRISMAsync Remote Manager for more information.

[6] Start Remote Manager

[7] Print queue of a printer

Description

1 List of printers that are configured in a cluster. The printer on top of the list is selected.

2 The lists of scheduled jobs on the selected printer. The toolbars have buttons to move, add, edit, and print jobs. 4

PRISMAsync Remote Manager

38 Chapter 3 - Explore the ease of operation VarioPrint 6000 line

Description

3 The lists of waiting jobs on the selected printer.

4 The DocBox and list of printed jobs.

PRISMAsync Remote Manager

Chapter 3 - Explore the ease of operation 39 VarioPrint 6000 line

PRISMAsync Remote Match PRISMAsync Remote Match is a cloud-based application that can align the color (printer- dependent), media and workflow configuration of similar printers in the printer fleet. Printers that belong to the same printer series and have the same printer software version can be grouped in a cluster.

The PRISMAsync Remote Match user can create a cluster, define what to synchronize, decide how to synchronize, and define which printers belong to the cluster. The synchronization process is started manually at the time the printers are not used or configured.

[8] List of printers with clusters

When a printer is part of a PRISMAsync Remote Match cluster, you will see one of the following status indicators in the dashboard of the control panel.

The synchronization of this printer has been started.

The last synchroniza- tion of this printer has been performed suc- cessfully.

The last synchroniza- tion of this printer caused one or more problems.

This printer has not been synchronized yet.

PRISMAsync Remote Match

40 Chapter 3 - Explore the ease of operation VarioPrint 6000 line

You can start PRISMAsync Remote Match from the Settings Editor. Location: [Configuration] [Connectivity][Cloud service][Open cloud service administration portal]

[9] [Open cloud service administration portal] option in [Cloud service] group

Use the help function or user guide of PRISMAsync Remote Match for more information.

PRISMAsync Remote Match

Chapter 3 - Explore the ease of operation 41 VarioPrint 6000 line

Media-based workflow The media catalog is the backbone of the media-based workflow. The media catalog contains the media that the print system supports.

The prepress staff select the media for the job from the media catalog. The control panel shows the operator the media the job needs.

The operator loads and assigns the media in the paper

trays.

Prepress staff selects the required media from the media

catalog.

The media and color defaults are defined in the media

catalog.

The operator can change job media and manage media in

the catalog.

[10] Media-based workflow

During the initial configuration of the print system, the media catalog is filled with media and media attributes.

When you work with the media catalog, you can take advantage of the following benefits: The media in the media catalog store print quality attributes that the entire print system uses.

Each time you select the media from the media catalog, the print system automatically applies the same print quality settings.

The control panel shows the operator which media to load. The control panel, Remote Printer Driver and the PRISMA software access the same media

catalog. You can also use the media catalog for copy jobs.

Define the media attributes on the control panel or with the Settings Editor.

The system administrator determines if operators are allowed to manage the media catalog from the control panel.

Media-based workflow

42 Chapter 3 - Explore the ease of operation VarioPrint 6000 line

Learn about the document printing workflow The following illustration shows the document print job workflow from the job preparation to the delivery of the prints.

Job preparation

Print production

Job planning

Waiting

jobs

Printed jobs

Scheduled

jobs

Workload planning

Remote Manager

DocBox

PRISMAsync driverPRISMAprepare

[11] Job workflow for document printing mode

1. Job preparation You can use PRISMAprepare, the remote printer driver, LPR, or hotfolders to submit jobs. The PDF documents can be created with specific graphical or office applications.

2. Workload planning Remote Manager is used to monitor the connected print systems, paper trays, scheduled jobs, and upcoming actions to manage the workload across all connected print systems. With the Remote Control app and Remote Manager you monitor the print production of the PRISMAsync Print Server printers remotely.

3. Job planning Print jobs are visible on the control panel: in the list of waiting jobs, the list of scheduled jobs, or a DocBox folder. The job properties determine the destination of the job. Job properties can be changed when the job arrives at the destination.

4. Print production The printer prints the jobs according to the job sequence in the list of scheduled jobs. Job media are loaded in the paper trays, prints and waste are removed in time and there are sufficient supplies of consumables in the printer.

Learn about the document printing workflow

Chapter 3 - Explore the ease of operation 43 VarioPrint 6000 line

Transaction printing workflow When there is a license for transaction printing (IPDS or PCL), you can operate the print system in the transaction printing mode. An IPDS or PCL host sends a streaming job to a dedicated port in the print system. The transaction printing mode fits print environments with large numbers of business critical data, such as invoices, checks and salary slips.

Typical for the transaction print mode is that first non-variable parts of a print job are stored on the print server and then merged with the variable parts of the print job.

Print production

Job planning

Scheduled

jobs

Job preparation

Applications to prepare and submit job stream

PRISMAproduction

Preflight and make ready

Data input

Job scheduling and monitor

[12] Job workflow for transaction printing mode

During daily work, you can switch between the transaction printing and document printing modes without rebooting the print system.

When the transaction printing mode is active, the print system still accepts PDF and PostScript jobs. However, PRISMAsync starts to process these jobs, when you switch off the transaction printing mode.

Differences between the two printing modes

The transaction printing mode is different from the document printing mode in several respects: 1. All data in one connection session are part of the same streaming job. This streaming job can

have job separators. In this instance, you can see the different job names on the control panel.

2. The print resolution for IPDS is 240, 300, 600 dpi, or automatically detected. 3. When the transaction printing jobs contain paper tray selection numbers, you can select a

mapping method. The paper tray number corresponds to a physical tray or to media from the catalog: Tray-to-media mapping

You can assign the paper tray number included in the print job to a physical paper tray. You select media from the media catalog and link these to a logical tray, indicated by a number. The print system maps the media of the logical tray to the physical paper trays that hold these media. The control panel shows the media which the job uses.

Tray-to-tray mapping

Transaction printing workflow

44 Chapter 3 - Explore the ease of operation VarioPrint 6000 line

You specify which logical tray (indicated by a number) corresponds to a physical paper tray. The print system will use the media that are loaded in the physical paper tray to which the job refers via a logical tray. Also other paper trays that contain these media are used when needed. The control panel shows the media which the job uses.

Transaction printing setups

A transaction printing setup is a collection of preset print settings for a transaction job, such as output location, data resolution, face orientation, offset stacking, font capture, and logical page size.

Create transaction printing setups in the Settings Editor.

Work in transaction printing mode

When you want to print in the transaction printing mode, first activate the transaction mode and establish the connection with the IPDS or PCL host. When you print in the transaction printing mode, the schedule informs you which types of media the streaming job uses. The schedule cannot predict the time needed for a streaming job.

Image adjustment

You can create a transaction printing preset with an image shift definition. This is useful for better alignment of variable data, such as names or addresses, on the page. You define the image shift on the control panel, but also in the Settings Editor.

Secure error recovery

When an job error occurs in transaction printing mode, the job recovery takes place from the page that caused the error. When multiple pages of the same document are not allowed, for example, for lotteries and bank accounts, you must adjust the error recovery settings. When you select the secure error recovery in the Settings Editor, the print system does not perform an output recovery and deletes all remaining pages. A stack eject follows when the printed output goes to the high capacity stacker. As a result, you must submit the job again.

Transaction printing workflow

Chapter 3 - Explore the ease of operation 45 VarioPrint 6000 line

Transaction printing workflow

46 Chapter 3 - Explore the ease of operation VarioPrint 6000 line

Chapter 4 Start the print system

The power buttons and power modes

The power buttons

The printer has the following button to control the power supply.

Button Name Description

Sleep button The Sleep button is located at the right-hand side of the control panel. Using the Sleep button puts the printer in- to sleep mode, wakes the printer up from the sleep mode or starts up the whole system, including the PRIS- MAsync controller. When you press the Sleep button when the system is off, the whole system starts up, in-

cluding the PRISMAsync controller. when the system is ready, the printer is put into sleep

mode. The control panel will be turned off, The PRIS- MAsync controller remains on.

when the system is in sleep mode, the printer wakes up from the sleep mode.

The Sleep button allows you to switch between the Ready mode and the Sleep mode.

The Power Modes

You can find the energy saving settings in the Settings Editor under [Preferences] -> [System settings] -> [Energy save modes].

The Power Modes

Power mode Control panel Description

Off Off The printer and the controller are completely off. The printer cannot receive or print any job.

Ready On The printer is ready to print jobs.

Low power mode Off The low power mode is an energy save mode. To use the low power mode, the [Low power mode tim- er] setting in the Settings Editor must be set to [Ena- bled]. When this setting is disabled, the printer skips the low power mode and goes into the sleep mode after the time set for this mode. When the printer has been idle for the time defined in the [Low power mode timer] setting, the printer goes in- to low power mode automatically. Possible values: 5-30minutes. Factory default: 20 minutes. The printer wakes up when a job arrives in the list of [Scheduled jobs] or when you touch the control panel (either the screen or any button). 4

The power buttons and power modes

48 Chapter 4 - Start the print system VarioPrint 6000 line

Power mode Control panel Description

Sleep mode Off Once the printer has been idle for the time defined in the [Sleep mode timer] setting in the Settings Editor, the printer goes into sleep mode automatically. Compared to the low power mode, the printer uses less energy. Possible values: 31 - 240 minutes. Factory default: 40 minutes. The printer wakes up when: You press the Sleep button on the control panel, or A wake-up timer expires, provided that the wake-up

timer is set to [Yes] in the Settings Editor, or A job arrives in the list of [Scheduled jobs], provided

that the [Automatic wake-up] setting in the Settings Editor is set to [Enabled].

Press the Sleep button on the right-hand side of the control panel to put the printer into the sleep mode man- ually. The printer goes into the sleep mode after all jobs are finished.

The power buttons and power modes

Chapter 4 - Start the print system 49 VarioPrint 6000 line

Turn on the system

Procedure

1. Press the Sleep button at the right-hand side of the control panel.

The power switch must be turned on.

Turn on the system

50 Chapter 4 - Start the print system VarioPrint 6000 line

Shut down the system

Illustration

[13] Shut down the system

Procedure

1. Touch [System] -> [Setup] -> [Shut down printer]. The control panel displays the message [Are you sure you want to shut down the printer?].

2. Touch [Yes]. A message indicates when the shut down will begin. When the shut down is complete, the control panel will be off.

3. To shut down the system completely, switch the On/Off button of each connected finishing unit into the "O" position.

Shut down the system

Chapter 4 - Start the print system 51 VarioPrint 6000 line

Restart the system

Introduction

You can restart the system via the Settings Editor (under [Support] -> [Troubleshooting]) or via the printer control panel.

Illustration

[14] Restart the system

Procedure

1. Touch [System] -> [Setup] -> [Shut down printer]. The control panel displays the message [Are you sure you want to shut down the printer?].

2. Touch [Restart].

Restart the system

52 Chapter 4 - Start the print system VarioPrint 6000 line

Log in, log out, and change passwords

Log in to the printer This topic contains the following instructions. 1. Access the printer without login 2. Log in with a factory defined user account 3. Log in with a custom user account 4. Log in with a smart card 5. See your password during login

Access without login

It depends on the Settings Editor option [Configuration][Users][Configure user login] [Access to control panel] if users are allowed to view and change the control panel options without user authentication.

It depends on the Settings Editor option [Configuration][Security][Passwords][Permission to view Settings Editor] if users are allowed to view the Settings Editor without user authentication. When you can view the Settings Editor without logging in, the name Visitor is shown.

Log in with a factory defined user account

When you use a factory defined user account, you can select the user account from a list.

Log in, log out, and change passwords

Chapter 4 - Start the print system 53 VarioPrint 6000 line

1. When the [Domain] drop-down list is displayed, select the hostname or IP address of the printer. Domains are defined by the system administrator.

2. Select the factory defined user account from the [Username] drop-down list. 3. Enter the password. 4. Touch or click [OK].

The name of the user account is displayed.

Log in with a custom user account

When you use a custom user account, you need to log in with a username.

1. When the [Domain] drop-down list is displayed, select the hostname or IP address of the printer.

Log in to the printer

54 Chapter 4 - Start the print system VarioPrint 6000 line

Domains are defined by the system administrator. 2. Select [Personal username] from the [Username] drop-down list. 3. Enter your username in the [Personal username] field. 4. Enter your password in the [Password] field. 5. Touch or click [OK].

After a successful login, the name of your user account is displayed.

Log in with a smart card

Your organization can use PKI or NFC smart cards to identify users of the printer. A single smart card can be used for the authentication of one or multiple user accounts. The user account credentials are configured on an LDAP directory server. 1. Insert your PKI smart card into the reader attached to the printer.

Hold your NFC smart card next to the reader attached to the printer. 2. Select your username, if the smart card is configured for multiple user accounts. 3. Enter your password or PIN in the [Password] field, if required. 4. Press [OK].

After a successful login, the name of your user account is displayed.

See your password during login

The password field where you type your password hides the characters you enter. Touch the eye symbol in the text field to check the characters you entered.

Log in to the printer

Chapter 4 - Start the print system 55 VarioPrint 6000 line

Log in to the printer

56 Chapter 4 - Start the print system VarioPrint 6000 line

Log out or switch roles This topic contains the following instructions. 1. End the session 2. Log out on the control panel and the Settings Editor 3. Log out on control panel when you use a PKI smart card 4. Log out on control panel when you use an NFC smart card 5. Log out in PRISMAsync Remote Manager 6. Switch roles to change settings

End the session

When you want to leave PRISMAsync Print Server, it is important to log out to end the session. It is also possible to authenticate again with other credentials without leaving PRISMAsync Print Server.

The local session timeout period determines how long you remain logged in without using the printer.

Log out on the control panel and the Settings Editor

1. On the control panel touch the name of your user account.

In the Settings Editor click the name of your user account.

2. Touch or click [Log out].

Log out on control panel when you use a PKI smart card

Remove your PKIsmart card from the reader.

Log out on control panel when you use an NFC smart card

Hold your NFC smart card next to the reader. You can also use the [Log out] option.

Log out in PRISMAsync Remote Manager

Click [Log out].

Log out or switch roles

Chapter 4 - Start the print system 57 VarioPrint 6000 line

Switch roles to change settings

When you are logged in to the Settings Editor or to the control panel and you want to perform a task for which you do not have sufficient rights, you can log in again with the appropriate credentials. Therefore, you need to have another user account that is authorized for this task.

Log out or switch roles

58 Chapter 4 - Start the print system VarioPrint 6000 line

Change password

When do you need to change your password

You are strongly recommended to follow the security guidelines of your organization. The definition of your password is part of these security guidelines. You are warned when your password no longer meets the guidelines.

NOTE This instruction does not apply to the password of a domain user account because this password is defined on the LDAP directory server.

Change a password

1. Log in from the control panel and touch the name of your user account.

Log in from the Settings Editor and click the name of your user account.

2. Touch or click [Change your password]. 3. Enter your current password.

Change password

Chapter 4 - Start the print system 59 VarioPrint 6000 line

4. Enter your new password and confirm the new password. 5. Touch or click [OK].

Change password

60 Chapter 4 - Start the print system VarioPrint 6000 line

Recover password This topic contains the following instructions. 1. Recover password from control panel 2. Recover password from Settings Editor or PRISMAsync Remote Manager

What is a password recovery mail

If you have lost your password, you can define a new password via a password recovery email. The email that holds the link to define a new password, is sent to the email address that belongs to your user account. Activate the link within four hours after your received the email.

IMPORTANT Ensure that your email address is part of your user account properties. Otherwise, the password must be changed in the PRISMAsync Print Server user account options. In case you do not have the rights to change the PRISMAsync Print Server user account options, you need to provide your password to the system administrator.

NOTE This recovery instruction does not apply to the password of a domain user account and the factory defined system administrator account.

Recover password from control panel

1. Go the control panel. 2. Enter your username and do not enter a password. 3. Press [OK].

Recover password

Chapter 4 - Start the print system 61 VarioPrint 6000 line

4. Touch [Forgot password?].

Recover password from Settings Editor or PRISMAsync Remote Manager

1. Click [Recover password] at the login window.

2. Click [OK].

Recover password

62 Chapter 4 - Start the print system VarioPrint 6000 line

Chapter 5 Prepare the print system

Adjust the control panel You can change several settings to adjust the control panel according to your needs or workflow.

Change the display language of the control panel

1. Touch [System] -> [Setup] -> [Language]. 2. Select the language. 3. Touch [OK]

Adjust the warning time

The dashboard and the operator attention light warn you when an operator intervention is expected. You can change the warning time or disable the warning in advance.

Choose a warning time so that you have sufficient time to prepare media or remove prints without a print system stop. The factory default is 10 minutes.

[16] Warning time setting

1. Touch [System] -> [Setup] -> [Warning time]. 2. Touch [Warning in advance] to enable or disable the function. 3. Touch the - or + button to decrease or increase the warning time in increments of 1 minute.

You can set a time from 1 - 60 minutes. 4. Touch [OK].

Define the display job names

Job names can be very long. You can indicate if you want to show the job name using two lines in the job list or how you want to truncate the name.

When you truncate a job name at the beginning, you can indicate how many characters are removed before the truncation. When you truncate a job name at the end, you can indicate how many characters are removed after the truncation.

Adjust the control panel

64 Chapter 5 - Prepare the print system VarioPrint 6000 line

[17] Job name truncation

1. Touch [System] -> [Setup] -> [Job name truncation]. 2. Indicate if you want to use the long job name. 3. Indicate how you want to shorten the job name. 4. Touch [OK].

Adjust the readability of the control panel

You can adjust the brightness and contrast of the control panel screen. Use the automatic or manual adjustment.

Setting Description

[Auto adjust] The screen of the control panel will automatically set the correct ratio of brightness and contrast.

[Brightness] You can increase or decrease the brightness from level 20 to 100 in steps of one. The higher the value, the higher the brightness.

[Contrast] You can increase or decrease the contrast from level 10 to 100 in steps of one. The higher the value, the higher the contrast.

Adjust the control panel

Chapter 5 - Prepare the print system 65 VarioPrint 6000 line

[18] Control panel adjustments

1. Touch [System] -> [Setup] -> [Control panel settings]. 2. Choose the automatic adjustment method or touch the + and - buttons to adjust the

brightness and contrast manually. 3. Touch [OK].

Adjust the control panel

66 Chapter 5 - Prepare the print system VarioPrint 6000 line

Define the handling of media attributes in JDF ticket When you select a media in the media catalog, all media attributes need to be specified. However, it can occur that not all media attributes in a JDF job ticket are specified. When you allow that not all media attributes in the JDF ticket are specified, media matching is used to find values for these attributes. The media catalog is queried with only the media attributes specified in the ticket. The missing attributes, except the size, are filled in from the first matching media. If no media size is specified, the size is taken from the PDL data. If no match was found in the media catalog, a temporary media is used with the missing attributes provided by the PDL data and/or defaults. 1. Open the Settings Editor and go to: [Media][Configuration].

[19] [Media] tab

2. Use the [Media attributes in JDF ticket] option to define how to handle media attributes in a JDF ticket. [Allow that not all media attributes are specified]: media matching is used to find values for

these attributes. [All media attributes must be specified]: the attributes of the JDF ticket, the print document,

and the default media attributes are used.

3. Click [OK].

Define the handling of media attributes in JDF ticket

Chapter 5 - Prepare the print system 67 VarioPrint 6000 line

Work with workflow profiles

Introduction

The machine is used in different printing environments. Each environment requires specific settings to optimize the workflow or to match personal workflow preferences. The machine contains a number of default workflow profiles to help you optimize your workflow. The default workflow profiles are combinations of frequently used settings for print jobs ([Receive], [Print] and [Output]). However, the workflow profiles cannot cover all the possible workflows you may need. Therefore, you can also define the settings individually (custom workflow).

This section makes recommendations about when to use which workflow profile. Furthermore, this section describes the settings and the effects of the settings.

NOTE The [Workflow profile] button in the [Setup] section of the [System] view displays the name of the selected workflow profile. When you customized the settings of a workflow profile, the button displays the text [Custom].

NOTE The [Workflow profile] button in the [Setup] section of the [System] view displays the name of the selected workflow profile. When you customized the settings of a workflow profile, the button displays the text [Custom].

The use of the default workflow profiles

The following sections make recommendations about when to use which default workflow profile.

Standard workflow profile

[Standard]

Print production

Job planning

Waiting

jobs DocBox

Scheduled

jobs

[20] Standard workflow profile

The standard workflow profile fits a productive workflow with suffi- cient control over jobs.

Jobs go to the list of scheduled jobs and the print system prints the jobs.

The print system selects another output tray for each next job.

Work with workflow profiles

68 Chapter 5 - Prepare the print system VarioPrint 6000 line

Job by job workflow profile

[Job by job]

Print production

Job planning

Waiting

jobs DocBox

Scheduled

jobs

[21] Job by job workflow profile

The job-by-job workflow profile fits a workflow in which every job needs attention.

All jobs come in the list of sched- uled jobs and you start the jobs one by one from the list of sched- uled jobs. Always touch [Resume] in the dashboard to start the next job.

The print system selects another output tray for each next job.

Check and print workflow profile

[Check and print]

Utskriftsproduktion

Jobbplanering

Vntande

jobb DocBox

Planerade

jobb

[22] Check and print workflow profile

The check-and-print workflow pro- file is suitable for a workflow in which every job requires attention. You check the print quality and layout setting of the first set.

All jobs are received in the list of scheduled jobs and only the first set of the job is printed. After ap- proval of the first set, you give the print command to print the other sets in one run.

The print system selects another output tray for each next job.

Manual planning workflow profile

[Manual planning]

DocBox

[23] Manual planning workflow profile

The manual planning workflow fits a workflow in which you want to determine the print priority of the jobs.

All jobs are received in the list of waiting jobs.

The print system selects another output tray for each next job.

Work with workflow profiles

Chapter 5 - Prepare the print system 69 VarioPrint 6000 line

Unattended workflow profile

[Unattended]

DocBox

[24] Unattended workflow profile

The unattended workflow profile fits a workflow in which productiv- ity is very important.

All jobs go to the list of scheduled jobs and are printed.

To keep the system running, you should make sure consumables remain available and you remove printed output and waste on time.

The default settings for [Receive]

The default [Receive] settings

Workflow profile [Receive] settings

[Destination of print job] [Destination of DocBox job]

[Standard] [Scheduled jobs] [Scheduled jobs]

[Job by job] [As in job] [Scheduled jobs]

[Check and print] [Scheduled jobs] [Scheduled jobs]

[Manual planning] [Waiting jobs] [Scheduled jobs]

[Unattended] [As in job] [Scheduled jobs]

The default settings for [Print]

The default [Print] settings

Workflow profile [Print] settings

[Confirm start of job: On] [Check first set]

[Standard] [Never] [As in job]

[Job by job] [On] [As in job]

[Check and print] [Never] [On]

[Manual planning] [Never] [As in job]

[Unattended] [Never] [Never]

The default settings for [Output]

The default [Output] settings

Workflow profile [Output] set tings

[Next output tray]

[Offset stacking] [Tray linking]

[Standard] [After each job] [As in job] [Never] 4

Work with workflow profiles

70 Chapter 5 - Prepare the print system VarioPrint 6000 line

Workflow profile [Output] set tings

[Next output tray]

[Offset stacking] [Tray linking]

[Job by job] [After each job] [As in job] [Never]

[Check and print] [After each job] [As in job] [Never]

[Manual planning] [After each job] [As in job] [Never]

[Unattended] [When tray is full]

[Banner pages] [Never]

Values and effects of the settings

The following table describes the effects of the various values of the settings.

Values and effects of the settings

Setting Values Effect

[Destination of print job]

[Scheduled jobs] The jobs are immediately sent to the list of [Scheduled jobs].

[Waiting jobs] The jobs are sent to the list of [Waiting jobs]. You can manually define the order in which the jobs will be prin- ted.

[As in job] The jobs are sent to the destination that is defined in the job ticket or in the copy job.

[Destination of DocBox job]

[Scheduled jobs] The jobs are immediately sent to the list of [Scheduled jobs].

[Waiting jobs] The jobs are sent to the list of [Waiting jobs]. You can manually define the order in which the jobs will be prin- ted.

[Confirm start of job: On]

[On] The machine always stops before the next scheduled job. Touch [Resume] in the dashboard to start each job.

[Never] The machine keeps printing all the jobs. The machine does not stop before the next scheduled job, unless there is a reason to stop. For example when a media is not available.

[Conflicting set- tings]

The machine only stops when there is a conflict in the next job. Resolve the conflict to continue printing.

[Check first set] [On] The machine goes on hold after the first set of a job is printed. You can check the quality and layout of the first set before the machine prints the remaining sets.

[Never] The machine will print the whole job without stopping after the first set.

[As in job] The machine will print the jobs as indicated in the job ticket. 4

Work with workflow profiles

Chapter 5 - Prepare the print system 71 VarioPrint 6000 line

Setting Values Effect

[Next output tray] [After each job] Each job is sent to the next available output tray. In this context, the second stack of the stacker is also defined as an output tray.

[When tray is full] All the jobs are stacked until an output tray is full. When an output tray is full, the next jobs are sent to the next output tray.

[Offset stacking] [Each job] Each printed job that is delivered to an output location is stacked on top of the previous printed job with an offset. This helps you to identify the various jobs.

[Each set] Each printed set that is delivered to an output location is stacked on top of the previous set with an offset. This helps you to identify the various sets.

[As in job] Each printed set is delivered to the output location as de- fined in the job ticket or copy job. Therefore, the sets can be stacked in one straight line or with an offset.

[Banner pages] Each banner page of a job is delivered to the output lo- cation with an offset. This helps you to identify the sepa- rate jobs. The jobs themselves are stacked in one straight line.

[Never] All the printed jobs or sets are stacked in one straight line. There is no offset between the jobs or sets.

[Tray linking] You can enable or disable the linking of output trays, when there are two or more high capacity stackers. Tray linking means that the prints delivery automatically switches to the other high ca- pacity stacker.

[Never] There is no tray linking.

[When stacker is full]

Tray linking occurs when the first high capacity stacker tray is full.

[After each stack] Tray linking occurs by switching to the other high ca- pacity after the delivery of a stack.

Work with workflow profiles

72 Chapter 5 - Prepare the print system VarioPrint 6000 line

Eject the stack after the system is idle for a certain time

Introduction

To prevent that the operator forgets to pick up finished output, you can set the [Ejection timer of stack tray]. After the system is idle for the defined timeout, the stacker automatically ejects the stack.

Procedure

1. Open the Settings Editor and go to: [Preferences][Print job defaults][Stacker] 2. Check that the setting [Automatic ejection of stack tray] is enabled. 3. Use the [Stack eject after idle time] option to define the [Ejection timer of stack tray]. 4. Click [OK].

Eject the stack after the system is idle for a certain time

Chapter 5 - Prepare the print system 73 VarioPrint 6000 line

Reprint the set after an error

Introduction

A printer error can occur while printing a set. When the error causes a restart of the printer, the set is printed only partially. Enable the setting [Reprint the complete set] to reprint the complete set.

Procedure

1. Open the Settings Editor and go to: [Preferences][System settings][Printer settings] 2. Enable the setting [Reprint the complete set] when you want to reprint the complete set after a

restart of the printer. Only applicable when an error caused the restart.

3. Click [OK].

Reprint the set after an error

74 Chapter 5 - Prepare the print system VarioPrint 6000 line

Work with automated workflows

Learn about automated workflows Automated workflows are managed in the Settings Editor. An automated workflow bundles a series of pre-set attributes to define job and workflow properties. You can apply an automated workflow when you submit one or more PDF jobs. One of the automated workflow attributes defines if the job ticket is ignored or not.

The printer has one factory defined automated workflow: (default). You can adjust the attributes of this automated workflow. You can also create other automated workflows.

[25] Automated workflows

You can apply an automated workflow at several locations. Hotfolder: The hotfolder definition has a link to one of the available automated workflows. PDF

files submitted via a hotfolder shortcut on the desktop retrieve the properties of an automated workflow or the properties of a JDF ticket. The system administrator can create new hotfolders.

NOTE You can use the ticket editor to create or modify a JDF ticket.

LPR printing: PDF files can be submitted to the printer with the name of an automated workflow in the LPR command. The queue name is the name of one of the available automated workflows. Jobs submitted via this LPR command take the job properties of the automated workflow.

Remote printer driver: When you select the name of an automated workflow, the submitted print job takes over the attributes of the automated workflow.

Remote Manager: When you add a new job, and you select the name of an automated workflow, the new added print job takes over the attributes of the automated workflow.

Control panel: When you use the [Apply automated workflow] function, and you select the name of an automated workflow, the job takes over the attributes of the automated workflow.

The [Job label] field in the print queue refers to the name of the automated workflow. You can select or filter print jobs according to this job label.

Work with automated workflows

Chapter 5 - Prepare the print system 75 VarioPrint 6000 line

[26] Select jobs with a certain label

Factory default automated workflow

The printer has one factory defined automated workflow: (default). The name of this automatic workflow is an empty string and cannot be changed. It is not possible to delete this automated workflow.

The printer uses this automated workflow when there is no other automated workflow selected, for example when the jobs properties are in the job ticket.

Learn about automated workflows

76 Chapter 5 - Prepare the print system VarioPrint 6000 line

Define a new automated workflow An automated workflow bundles a series of pre-defined job properties. 1. Open the Settings Editor and go to: [Workflow][Automated workflows].

[27] Workflow menu

2. Use the [Add], [Edit] or [Copy] function.

[28] Automated workflow menu

3. Define the attributes (see Define the attributes of an automated workflow on page 78).

NOTE It is not mandatory to define all the settings. When you put a check mark in front of a setting, that setting and its values become enabled.

4. Click [OK].

NOTE If needed, you can delete one or more automated workflows or restore the factory defined, default automated workflow. You cannot delete the factory default automated workflow.

Define a new automated workflow

Chapter 5 - Prepare the print system 77 VarioPrint 6000 line

Define the attributes of an automated workflow NOTE It is not mandatory to define all the settings. When you put a check mark in front of a setting, that setting and its values become enabled.

[General] attributes Description

[Queue name] You can enter a distinguishing name for the automated workflow (maximum 25 characters). This name is also used as a label on the control panel. This helps the operator to identify certain jobs on the control panel. In this way, the operator can identify from which LPR queue or workflow the job has arrived. Different LPR queues can have the same label if the operator chooses to do so. In that case, the operator cannot distinguish from which specific queue a job has arrived. The LPR queue name is not displayed on the con- trol panel.

[Description] You can enter a description of maximum 200 characters.

[Overrule job ticket] When this settings is enabled, then the settings of the automated workflow will be used. When this setting is disabled, then the settings of the job ticket will be used.

[Note for operator] You can create a note, for example a print or finishing instruction, for the operator.

[Number of sets] You can indicate how many sets of a job must be printed.

[Sorting] You can indicate whether the jobs must be sorted [By Set] or [By Page].

[Variable data job (pages per record)]

Use this function to indicate that the job is a variable data job. En- ter the number of pages that composes a record.

[Media]attributes Description

[Media] You can enter the media that must be used.

[Fit to media size] You can indicate whether every page must be scaled to the media size.

[Layout] attributes Description

[Print sides] You can indicate whether the jobs must be printed one-sided or two-sided.

[Orientation] You can indicate whether the prints must be [Portrait] or [Land- scape].

[Rotate 180 degrees] You can indicate that the prints must be rotated 180 degrees. 4

Define the attributes of an automated workflow

78 Chapter 5 - Prepare the print system VarioPrint 6000 line

[Layout] attributes Description

[Tumble] You can indicate the orientation of page images on opposite sides of a sheet. When [Tumble] is set to [Yes], the two pages are oriented in such a way that the binding is at the top or bottom. The image is rota- ted 180 degrees on alternate pages. Both sides of the page are printed. However, the position of the image is reversed (from top to bottom) on every other page. When [Tumble] is set to [No], the binding is at the left or right. The images are not rotated on alternate pages.

NOTE [Tumble] is only possible when the setting [Print sides] is set to [2-sided].

[Impositioning] You can indicate how the prints must look, for example [2-up] or [Same 2-up].

[Impositioning size] You can indicate the size of booklet jobs.

[Margin Shift] You can indicate the margin shift of the front side and the back side in two directions. Enter '0' to indicate that there is not shift re- quired.

[Image shift] You can indicate the image shift of the front side and the back side in two directions. Enter '0' to indicate that there is not shift re- quired.

[Special pages] attributes Description

[Front or booklet cover] You can indicate which media must be used for the front covers or booklet covers.

[Printing on front cover] You can indicate which sides of the front cover must be printed.

[Back cover] You can indicate which media must be used for the back covers.

[Printing on back cover] You can indicate which sides of the back cover must be printed.

[Perfect binding] You can indicate where the binding must be done, for example [Left binding] or [Right binding]

[Finishing] attributes Description

[Stapling] You can indicate where the prints must be stapled, for example [Top left] or [Top right].

[Output tray] You can indicate where the jobs are sent, for example to the stack- er.

[Sheet order] You can indicate the order in which the sheets will be delivered, for example [Face down - Normal order].

[Feed edge] You can indicate whether the sheets will be fed [Long edge] or [Short edge].

[Header orientation] You can indicate whether the header of the sheets must be [Head- er-up] or [Header-down].

[Offset stacking] You can indicate whether each next job or set must be stacked with an offset compared to the previous job or set. 4

Define the attributes of an automated workflow

Chapter 5 - Prepare the print system 79 VarioPrint 6000 line

[Finishing] attributes Description

[Offset after N sets] You can indicate the number of sets that will be shifted together.

[Punching] You can indicate how many punch holes are required.

[Folding] You can indicate the required folding method.

[Fold side] You can indicate the side that must be folded.

[Trimming] You can indicate how the media must be trimmed.

[Trim / target width ({0})] You can indicate the width that must be trimmed.

[Trim / target height ({0})] You can indicate the height that must be trimmed.

[Print quality] attributes Description

[Contrast adjustment] You can indicate the contrast of the print.

[Brightness adjustment] You can indicate whether the print must be darker or lighter.

[Resolution] You can indicate whether the job must be printed on [1200 x 1200 dpi] or [600 x 2400 dpi].

[Halftoning] You can indicate whether the job must be printed [Line 200 LPI], [Dot 200 LPI] or [Dot 125 LPI].

[Fattening] You can indicate whether [Fattening] must be on or off.

[Minimum line width] You can indicate whether the minimum line width must be main- tained, or thinner lines can be printed.

[Enhanced color rendering] You can indicate whether the [Enhanced color rendering] must be on or off.

[Workflow] attributes Description

[Job destination] You can indicate the list to which the job must be sent. For the VarioPrint 6000 line, you can select [Waiting jobs], [Scheduled jobs] or [DocBox jobs] (optional).

[DocBox name] You can indicate the name of the DocBox to which the jobs must be sent.

[Printing workflow] You can indicate the type of workflow for the jobs. You can select [Receive, then print while RIP is in progress] or [Streaming].

[PDL type] You can indicate whether PostScript, PCL, PDF or XPS must be used as page description language.

[Banner pages for print jobs]

Indicate if a banner page is used.

[Trailer pages for print jobs]

Indicate if a trailer pages is used.

[Media of banner/trailer page]

Select the media of the banner and trailer page.

[Separator sheets for print jobs]

[ Separator sheets separate job sets. Separator sheets are not printed. A separator sheet is added after one or multiple (N) sets.]

[Separator sheet after N sets]

[Indicate after how many sets you want to include a separator sheet in the stack. N represents the number of sets.] 4

Define the attributes of an automated workflow

80 Chapter 5 - Prepare the print system VarioPrint 6000 line

[Workflow] attributes Description

[Media of separator sheets] Select the media of the separator sheets.

[PDF XObject optimization] [Select whether XObjects are cached per document or re-interpre- ted per page. 'Automatic': only the XObjects of PDF-VT documents are cached. 'Yes': the XObjects of all PDF documents are cached. 'No': all XObjects are re-interpreted per page.]

[PDF to PostScript conver- sion]

[Indicate if you want to convert PDF to PostScript instead of only using the native PDF RIP, which is the default setting value.]

[Print range] attributes Description

[First page of print range] When you want to print a part of the document, enter the first page number of the print range. When you do not enter the last page, the range ends at the last document page.

[Last page of the print range]

When you want to print a part of the document, enter the last page number of the print range. When you do not enter the fist page, the range begins at the first document page.

[First record of the print range]

When you want to print a part of the document of a variable data job, enter the last page number of the print range. When you do not enter the last record, the range ends at the last record.

[Last record of print range] When you want to print a part of the document a variable data job, enter the last page number of the print range. When you do not enter the fist record, the range begins at the first record.

[Accounting] attributes Description

[Account ID] You can indicate the account number of the customer that will be used for accounting purposes.

[Cost center] [Cost center can be a maximum of 40 characters long.]

[Custom] [Custom can be a maximum of 255 characters long.]

[Page numbering] attrib utes

Description

[Use page numbers] You can indicate whether or not you want to print a page number on each page of a PDF print job.

[Start with page number] You can indicate with which number the page numbering starts.

[Location] You can indicate the position of the page number on the page.

[Text before page number] You can indicate the text that is printed before the page number.

[Text after page number] You can indicate the text that is printed after the page number.

Define the attributes of an automated workflow

Chapter 5 - Prepare the print system 81 VarioPrint 6000 line

Restore the default automated workflow An automated workflow bundles a series of pre-defined job properties.

When you want to restore the default automated workflow you use the [Restore] function.

IMPORTANT

Be aware that this function removes all custom automated workflows.

[29] Automated workflows

1. Open the Settings Editor and go to: [Workflow][Automated workflows].

[30] Workflow menu

2. Click [Restore]. 3. Click [OK].

Restore the default automated workflow

82 Chapter 5 - Prepare the print system VarioPrint 6000 line

Apply an automated workflow in job destination You can apply an automated workflow when you submit one or more PDF jobs.

It is also possible to apply an automated workflow to jobs that are visible on the control panel. You can apply an automated workflow to jobs on the control panel in the following situations: You want to change multiple job properties of a job that is stored on a USB drive. You define

an automated workflow that covers these job properties. You want to change multiple jobs in the same way. You define an automated workflow that

covers the job properties. You want to restore original job properties. You apply the (default) automated workflow to the

job.

NOTE The job destination that is defined in the automated workflow will be ignored. The job remains in its location.

IMPORTANT Be aware that the automated workflow will also replace the changes you already made.

The [Apply automated workflow] function is available in the following locations.

Function Scheduled jobs

Waiting jobs DocBox Printed jobs

[Apply automated workflow]

[31] Apply an automated workflow to a job

Apply automated workflow

1. Select one or more jobs. 2. Touch the [Apply automated workflow] function in the drop-down menu. 3. Select the required automated workflow in the [Automated workflow] drop-down list.

Apply an automated workflow in job destination

Chapter 5 - Prepare the print system 83 VarioPrint 6000 line

[32] Select automated workflow

NOTE Select the (default) automated workflow to restore the original job properties.

4. Press [OK].

NOTE You can filter jobs based on job label. The [Job label] field is the name of the automated workflow that has been applied.

Apply an automated workflow in job destination

84 Chapter 5 - Prepare the print system VarioPrint 6000 line

Submit jobs via LPR PDF files can be submitted to the printer with an LPR command. When you print via LPR the queue name is the name of an automated workflow. Jobs submitted via LPR take over the attributes of the automated workflow.

An automated workflow bundles a series of pre-set attributes to define jobs.

[33] [Automated workflow] menu

1. On your workstation, make sure the Windows LPR command has been installed. 2. Use the LPR command line and the following command format:

lpr -S -P

More information

Learn about automated workflows on page 75

Submit jobs via LPR

Chapter 5 - Prepare the print system 85 VarioPrint 6000 line

Use hotfolders

Introduction to hotfolders

Introduction

Technically, a hotfolder is a mapped network drive on a workstation that is linked to a shared folder on the PRISMAsync controller.

Hotfolders enable you to submit print jobs by simply dragging and dropping ready-to-print PDF files onto a shortcut on your desktop.

Hotfolders are primarily aimed at recurring workflows. In these workflows identical printable files with identical settings are printed on a regular basis. Hotfolders should not be used in combination with print job tickets.

The job settings for hotfolders

The settings of a hotfolder can be defined by: A hotfolder default ticket in the hotfolder itself, or The automated workflow to which the hotfolder is linked.

It is advisable to use the hotfolder functionality in combination with the hotfolder default ticket.

However, if you want to use the settings of the automated workflow where the hotfolder is linked to, it is advised not to place a hotfolder default ticket in the hotfolder, to prevent mixing up settings. Furthermore, you must make sure that the [Overrule the job ticket] setting in that automated workflow is enabled (tick the checkbox).

Before you can use a hotfolder

To be able to use the hotfolder function, the following steps must be carried out first: In the Settings Editor, the system administrator must activate the hotfolder function. In the Settings Editor, the system administrator must create a hotfolder and link the hotfolder

to an automated workflow. On a workstation, the key operator must create a shared network drive that is linked to the

hotfolder. On the desktop of that workstation, the key operator can create a shortcut to the hotfolder, if

desired.

In the next paragraphs you can read more information about hotfolders. See the administration guide for in depth information about hotfolders.

Use hotfolders

86 Chapter 5 - Prepare the print system VarioPrint 6000 line

Configure hotfolders A hotfolder is a shared folder on PRISMAsync Print Server. A hotfolder is linked to an automated workflow to determine the job settings for a hotfolder.

The system administrator can configure hotfolder settings.

[34] Hotfolders

When you want to Solution

Go to the hotfolders 1. Open the Settings Editor and go to: [Workflow][Hotfolders].

Enable and configure the hotfolder function

1. Click [Configure]. 2. Select the protocols you want to use.

3. Click [OK].

Add a hotfolder 1. Click [Add]. 2. Enter a name for the hotfolder.

3. Select the automated workflow that has the required job set- tings.

4. Define the access rights Select [All authorized users] when all authorized user ac-

counts are allowed to access this hotfolder. Select [Authorized users of a specific user group] when all

authorized user accounts of a specific user group are al- lowed to access this hotfolder.

5. Select the user group if you indicated that in step 4. 6. Click [OK]. 4

Configure hotfolders

Chapter 5 - Prepare the print system 87 VarioPrint 6000 line

When you want to Solution

Edit a hotfolder 1. Select a hotfolder. 2. Click [Edit]. 3. Change the required attributes. 4. Click [OK].

Delete a hotfolder 1. Select a hotfolder. 2. Click [Delete].

Create a shortcut to a hot- folder on a Windows sys- tem

1. Start the standard Windows wizard to map a network drive. 2. Use the link to connect to the PRISMAsync hotfolder to share

documents or files. 3. Enter the path to the hotfolder.

This path is displayed in the hotfolder settings in the Settings Editor. For WebDAV use the format: http(s):// /dav/

folder name> or http(s):// /dav/ . For SMB use the format: \\ \ or

\\ \ . 4. Enter the username and password. 5. Enter a name for the network location. 6. Drag and drop the hotfolder to your desktop.

Create a shortcut to a hot- folder on a MAC system

1. Open the Finder. 2. Click [Go][Connect to Server...]. 3. Enter the path to the hotfolder.

Use the format: http:// / or http:// / This path is displayed in the hotfolder settings in the Settings Editor.

4. Click [Connect]. 5. Enter the username and password.

After approval of the login information, the Finder opens and automatically opens the mounted drive with the hotfolder name.

Create a JDF ticket for a hotfolder

1. Click [Ticket editor]. 2. Make the required settings. 3. Click [Save ticket]. 4. Open the folder where the ticket is saved from your web

browser. 5. Drag and drop the ticket into the hotfolder. 6. Make sure the [Overrule job ticket] option of the correspond-

ing automated workflow is unchecked. (Define the attributes of an automated workflow on page 78)

Configure hotfolders

88 Chapter 5 - Prepare the print system VarioPrint 6000 line

Submit jobs via hotfolders Hotfolders enable you to submit print jobs by simply drag & drop printable files onto a shortcut on your desktop. The job properties are taken over from the automated workflow that is part of the hotfolder definition or from the JDF ticket that you put in the hotfolder.

It depends on the [Overrule job ticket] function of the automated workflow whether the properties of the automated workflow or the properties of the job ticket are used.

The system administrator creates the hotfolders on PRISMAsync Print Server and defines the user authentication for the hotfolders.

The system administrator can define the order in which jobs are printed.

[35] Drag & drop print files

Create a shortcut to a hotfolder on a Windows workstation

1. Start the standard Windows wizard to map a network drive. 2. In the dialog, use the link to connect to a website to share documents or files. 3. Go to the [Hotfolders] tab of the Settings Editor. There you can read the path to the hotfolder.

Use the following format: http(s):// / or http(s):// /

[36] Hotfolders

4. Enter your username and password.

Use a JDF ticket

1. Go the hotfolder shortcut on the workstation. 2. Drag & drop the Default_ticket.jdf file on the hotfolder shortcut.

Drag & drop printable files on a hotfolder

1. Select the printable files and drag & drop them on the hotfolder shortcut.

Submit jobs via hotfolders

Chapter 5 - Prepare the print system 89 VarioPrint 6000 line

After printing, the printable files are removed from the hotfolder.

Submit jobs via hotfolders

90 Chapter 5 - Prepare the print system VarioPrint 6000 line

Accounting

General Information

The basics of accounting

Introduction

NOTE Accounting requires a license. Contact your local authorized dealer for more information.

The accounting function is meant to charge the costs for jobs to customers or users.

Below, the basics of accounting are described. Detailed information about the accounting function is described in separate chapters.

Basics

Mandatory: To use the accounting function, a license file must be uploaded to the PRISMAsync controller first. Then the account log file is created too. For each job, the account log file stores job information such as type of job and account ID, if applicable. To calculate the costs, you can download the account log files via the Settings Editor.

NOTE In the Settings Editor, navigate to [Configuration] -> [Accounting] for all accounting settings. Only key operators or system administrators can perform actions in the [Accounting] section.

Accounting

Chapter 5 - Prepare the print system 91 VarioPrint 6000 line

The accounting related settings in the Settings Editor

Description

NOTE Accounting requires a license. Contact your local authorized dealer for more information.

The table below describes the available accounting related settings in the Settings Editor (navigate to [Configuration] -> [Accounting]).

The accounting related settings

Setting Description

[New account log file] With this setting you indicate when a new account log file is created: [At start of day] [At start of week] [At start of calendar month]

[Download account log file] You can save the account log files to a location on your PC or network to create invoices for customers, for ex- ample.

[Separator in account log file] This setting allows you to select the character used in the account log files to separate the information. You can select [Use ';' (semi-colon)] or [Use ',' (comma)].

[Encoding of account log file] This settings allows you to indicate that the account log files must be encoded in UTF-8.

The accounting related settings in the Settings Editor

92 Chapter 5 - Prepare the print system VarioPrint 6000 line

The Account Log File

The Account Log File

The Name of an Account Log File

NOTE Accounting requires a license. Contact your local authorized dealer for more information.

An account log file has the following name format:

, for example 012345678920120115.CSV.

Item Description

The serial number of the device. This number is a text string with a maximum length of 10 characters (A-Z, a-z, 0-9). The serial number is provided by the PRISMAsync con- troller at the moment the account log file is created.

The year, month and day the account log file was created.

The file extension, either .CSV (Comma Separated Values) for inactive log files, or .ACL (ACtive Log) for the active log file. For the current file, the file has the extension .ACL. At the end of the in- dicated period, the .ACL file is converted into a .CSV file. With the set- ting [New account log file] in the Settings Editor you indicate when a new account log file is created: per day, per week, per month. The PRISMAsync controller can store a maximum of 99 .CSV files + 1 .ACL file. When the limit is reached, the oldest .CSV file is removed. You can retrieve the account log files from the Settings Editor ([Config- uration] -> [Accounting] -> [Download account log file]) and import the files into Microsoft Excel, for example.

Data Records

An account log file consists of data records. The data records contain information about the use of the VarioPrint 6000 line. For each job, a new data record is added to the current account log file.

The first record of an account log file is the header record. The header record always starts with 4302. Every subsequent data record starts with 4303. These records contain the actual accounting information for each job.

The Fields of an Account Log File

The following table describes the fields of each data record in an account log file.

Field name Specification Description

4303 A number that identifies a data record. 4

The Account Log File

Chapter 5 - Prepare the print system 93 VarioPrint 6000 line

Field name Specification Description

A text string with a max- imum length of 40 char- acters

A unique identification for a job or document, which is supplied by the submitter of the job. The document ID is extracted from the print data, for ex- ample the attribute 'documentid' in an OJT. This field keeps the same value when the job is submit- ted multiple times. The field is empty when the at- tribute is not available.

A number The PRISMAsync controller creates a unique job identification number when: A new print job is received A new copy or scan job is started An existing job is started from the mailbox An existing job is moved from the [Printed jobs]

section to the [Waiting jobs] section

NOTE The term mailbox is understood to in- clude the list of [Waiting jobs] and the [DocBox].

Possible entries: COPY IP AP SYSTEM SCAN SCAN2MBX MBXCOPY

Describes the type of job. COPY: Direct copy job IP: Interactive print job (a job that was printed

from the mailbox). AP: Automatic print job (a job that was directly

printed from the network, not from the mailbox) SYSTEM: A test print that was started in the serv-

ice mode or service copy mode. SCAN: A scan-to-file job. SCAN2MBX: A job that was scanned to the mail-

box. MBXCOPY: A copy job that was printed from the

mailbox.

NOTE The term mailbox is understood to in- clude the list of [Waiting jobs] and the [DocBox].

- -

NOTE When you open the file in Microsoft Excel, the date format changes into the date for- mat that is de- fined in Micro- soft Excel

The date on which the printer started printing the job. Typically, this is the first moment that a job can be interrupted or stopped via the control panel.

4

The Account Log File

94 Chapter 5 - Prepare the print system VarioPrint 6000 line

Field name Specification Description

: :

NOTE When you open the file in Microsoft Excel, the time format changes into the time for- mat that is de- fined in Micro- soft Excel

The time on which the printer started printing the job. Typically, this is the first moment that a job can be interrupted or stopped via the control panel.

: : The total time the job is active and actually printing. Hours can exceed 24.

: : The total time the job is active, but waits for an ac- tion by the operator, such as clearing an error or loading the required media. Hours can exceed 24.

- -

The date on which the job was finished or aborted.

: : The time the job was finished or aborted.

Possible entries: Done Abrt Stop

Information about how the job was completed. Done: The job was finished correctly. Abrt: The operator or the PRISMAsync controller

stopped or aborted the job, for example in case of an error.

Stop: The job was stopped by the user and moved to the [Waiting jobs] section. When the job is restarted or continued later, multiple ac- count records will be generated for this job.

A text string with a max- imum length of 255 characters

The user name that is defined for the job, for exam- ple in the attribute 'username' in an OJT.

A text string with a max- imum length of 255 characters

The name of the job for automatic or interactive print jobs and scan jobs, for example in the attrib- ute 'jobname' in an OJT. For scan jobs, the gener- ated file name is used.

A text string with a max- imum length of 40 char- acters

The name of a department or user as defined in the [Cost center] field of the [Account] tab of the printer driver or in the attribute 'GroupName' in an OJT. This field is empty when the attribute is not availa- ble

A text string with a max- imum length of 255 characters

Information as defined in the [Custom] field of the [Account] tab of the printer driver or in the attribute 'custom' in an OJT, for example. This field is empty when the attribute is not availa- ble 4

The Account Log File

Chapter 5 - Prepare the print system 95 VarioPrint 6000 line

Field name Specification Description

A text string with a max- imum length of 40 char- acters

The account ID as defined in the [Account ID] field of the [Account] tab of the printer driver, or on the control panel, or in the attribute 'accountid' in an OJT, for example. This field is empty when the attribute is not availa- ble

A text string with a max- imum length of 255 characters

The name of the recipient of the print job. The name is extracted from the print data, for example the attribute 'jobaddressee' in an OJT.

A number The number of scanned A4-like sides, including custom sized sheets of which at least one dimen- sion is equal to or less than 257 mm / 10.1".

A number The number of scanned A3-like sides, including custom sized sheets of which all dimensions are larger than 257 mm / 10.1".

A number The number of times that a single staple was used in a job.

NOTE This number does not include the staples from an off-line stapler.

A number The number of times that double staples were used in a job.

NOTE This number does not include the staples from an off-line stapler.

A number The number of finished sets. A set is finished after the last sheet is sent to the output location.

Names of output loca- tions

A descriptive name of the output location. The ex- act names vary per product and depend on the con- figuration of the product.

A number The number of printed A4-like sides (copy jobs or print jobs) printed in B&W. Inserts will be counted as B&W too.

A number The number of printed A4-like sides (copy jobs or print jobs) printed in color.

A number The number of printed A3-like sides (copy jobs or print jobs) printed in B&W. Inserts will be counted as B&W too.

A number The number of printed A3-like sides (copy jobs or print jobs) printed in color.

Value in milligrams The estimated total usage of black toner for sheets that are printed or copied in B&W.

Value in milligrams The estimated total usage of toner for sheets that are printed or copied in color. 4

The Account Log File

96 Chapter 5 - Prepare the print system VarioPrint 6000 line

Field name Specification Description

(1-16)*

A number The number of 1-sided sheets of a certain paper type used in a job.

(1-16)*

A number The number of 2-sided sheets of a certain paper type used in a job.

(1-16)*

A text string with a max- imum length of 255 characters

The media size used for the job. Not every product supports all media sizes.

(1-16)*

A text string with a max- imum length of 40 char- acters. Some entries are standardized: PLAIN TRANS COVER MYPAPER COLOR_COPY COATED OTHER

Description of the media types used. PLAIN: normal paper TRANS: transparencies COVER: a special front or back page MYPAPER: a special media type that must be

placed in a paper tray before starting the job, and that must be removed from that paper tray as soon as the job is ready.

COLOR_COPY: color copy paper COATED: coated media OTHER: unspecified media. This is used when

custom strings are not available.

(1-16)*

A number The weight of the media type in grams per m or lb.

(1-16)*

A text string with a max- imum length of 40 char- acters

The color of the media used for the job.

(1-16)*

A text string with a max- imum length of 40 char- acters

The name of the media used for the job.

(1-16)*

A number If subsequent sheets are not identical (cyclic me- dia), the cycle length indicates after how many sheets the same sequence starts again. For normal media the cycle length is 1. For cyclic media with an unknown cycle length, the cycle length is 0.

(1-16)*

Yes or no ('y' or 'n') A media attribute that indicates whether the bit- maps are printed on this media (y) or not (n). An insert sheet can be 1-sided or 2-sided. The bit- maps corresponding to insert sheets typically are still part of the print job. Selection of insert media enforces that these bitmaps are not printed (again) on the insert media.

(1-16)* Yes or no ('y' or 'n') This is a media attribute that indicates whether the media is tab media. Typically, tab media has a cycle length of 1, but this is not mandatory

(1-16)*

A number The number of punch holes of the prepunched me- dia.

A number The number of punched sheets in a job.

A number The number of creased sheets in a job. 4

The Account Log File

Chapter 5 - Prepare the print system 97 VarioPrint 6000 line

Field name Specification Description

A number The number of folded sheets in a job.

A number The number of booklets in a job.

A number The number of bound sets in a job.

A text string The operator name.

A number The number of printed black and white XL sheets.

Value Not applicable for the VarioPrint 6000 line

Value Not applicable for the VarioPrint 6000 line

A number Not applicable for the VarioPrint 6000 line

A number Not applicable for the VarioPrint 6000 line

Value in milliliters (mL) Not applicable for the VarioPrint 6000 line

Value in milliliters (mL) Not applicable for the VarioPrint 6000 line

Value in milliliters (mL) Not applicable for the VarioPrint 6000 line

Value in milliliters (mL) Not applicable for the VarioPrint 6000 line

Value in milliliters (mL) Not applicable for the VarioPrint 6000 line

Value in milliliters (mL) Not applicable for the VarioPrint 6000 line

A number Not applicable for the VarioPrint 6000 line

A number Not applicable for the VarioPrint 6000 line

A number Not applicable for the VarioPrint 6000 line

Value in milliliters (mL) Not applicable for the VarioPrint 6000 line

A number Not applicable for the VarioPrint 6000 line

(1-16)*

A text string Not applicable for the VarioPrint 6000 line

The Account Log File

98 Chapter 5 - Prepare the print system VarioPrint 6000 line

NOTE * All fields that contain (1-16) will be included 16 times in an account log file. Each number refers to the type of media (1 up to 16) that is used. The media characteristics of the first media type in a job are logged in the fields ending on '1'. The characteristics of the next, different media type are logged in the fields ending with '2' and so on. For example, and both correspond to the second type of media used in a job. If you use less than 16 media types, the remaining fields are empty. If you use more than 16 media types, they are logged as if they were media type 16. The maximum number of media types per job is 16.

The Account Log File

Chapter 5 - Prepare the print system 99 VarioPrint 6000 line

Download an account log file

Procedure

NOTE Accounting requires a license. Contact your local authorized dealer for more information.

1. In the Settings Editor, click [Configuration] -> [Accounting]. 2. Click [Download account log file]. 3. Select one of the available account log files, then click [OK]. 4. Browse to the location where you want to save the file, then click [Save].

Download an account log file

100 Chapter 5 - Prepare the print system VarioPrint 6000 line

Chapter 6 Prepare the print jobs

Where to define print job settings

Introduction

Print jobs can vary from straightforward jobs with only a few settings to complex jobs with extended settings. Therefore, there are several possibilities to define the settings for your print jobs. For straightforward jobs, the use of the printer driver can be fine. If you often print recurring jobs with identical, complex settings, the use of automated workflows or hotfolders can be the best way to print your jobs. This section gives an overview of various possibilities.

NOTE It is strongly recommended to define the settings for a print job in only one place, for example in a printer driver or in an automated workflow, but not in both. Otherwise, undesired output results can occur because settings can become mixed.

Where to define print job settings

Define the job settings

Item Description

PDL settings The job will be printed using either the PDL default settings as defined in the Settings Editor, or the PDL settings that were defined in a job itself, as interpreted

by the PDL.

Job ticket The job will be printed using the settings that were defined in the printer driver. When you frequently print jobs with identical settings, you can use the template function of the printer driver. Templates contain predefined job settings. You can also create your own custom templates.

Hotfolder Hotfolders are primarily aimed at recurring print workflows. In these workflows, identical PDFs or other printable files with identi- cal settings are printed on a regular basis. The advantage of a hot- folder is that you do not have to open a file and check the settings before printing. Operators can see hotfolders as a folder on their workstation where they can simply drag & drop files. A hotfolder option is the default ticket ('default_ticket.jdf') in a hot- folder, which defines the settings for the print jobs. The files will be printed according to settings of the hotfolder default ticket in that hotfolder.

Automated workflow Automated workflows are LPR print queues that you can pro- gramme to perform a range of operations. Automated workflows are primarily aimed at recurring print jobs with identical settings that must be printed the same way as before. The advantage of automated workflows is that you do not have to open a file and check the settings before printing. 4

Where to define print job settings

102 Chapter 6 - Prepare the print jobs VarioPrint 6000 line

Item Description

Control panel After a print job has arrived on the PRISMAsync controller, the print job becomes visible on the control panel. There you can change a number of job settings or combine print jobs, for exam- ple. It is best to change the print job settings in the list of [Waiting jobs] or in the optional [DocBox].

NOTE You can only make changes to jobs that are currently not being printed.

Where to define print job settings

Chapter 6 - Prepare the print jobs 103 VarioPrint 6000 line

Prepare print jobs with Remote Printer Driver

PRISMAsync Remote Printer Driver

The printer driver is the remote point to prepare a print job from a desktop application, such as Microsoft Office and Adobe Acrobat. The job properties in the printer driver match the job properties on the control panel and PRISMAsync Remote Manager. A job submitted with the printer driver can easily be changed when the job is visible in the print queue on the control panel of in PRISMAsync Remote Manager.

In the illustration you see the main parts of the printer driver. Use the online help of the printer driver when you need more information. Printer status and available media (1) General job settings (2, 3, 4, 5, 6) Layout settings (7) Print quality settings (8) Finishing settings (9) Job production settings (10) Job templates (11)

[37] PRISMAsync Remote Printer Driver

Prepare print jobs with Remote Printer Driver

104 Chapter 6 - Prepare the print jobs VarioPrint 6000 line

Print a job using PRISMAprepare (option)

Introduction

PRISMAprepare (optional) is a software application that enables you to prepare your print jobs on page level. You can preview the result per page.

This procedure describes the most important steps for the preparation of print jobs.

NOTE See the online help of PRISMAprepare for all the details.

Procedure

1. Prepare the document with PRISMAprepare. 2. Use the media catalog in PRISMAprepare to define the media.

With PRISMAprepare you can export the media catalog to PRISMAsync controllers. 3. Define the required finishing options.

Print a job using PRISMAprepare (option)

Chapter 6 - Prepare the print jobs 105 VarioPrint 6000 line

Drag & drop print files on hotfolders Use hotfolders to submit multiple print files to the print system. The automated workflow that is linked to the hotfolder determines the print properties. In this way, all print files are printed with the same settings. A hotfolder can be accessed from multiple workstations.

The system administrator can define the order in which jobs are printed.

[38] Drag & drop print files

Procedure

1. Drag & drop print files on the shortcut of your desktop.

After you finish

PRISMAsync removes the print files from the hotfolder after printing.

Drag & drop print files on hotfolders

106 Chapter 6 - Prepare the print jobs VarioPrint 6000 line

Print a file from a USB drive

Introduction

You can print documents (*.pdf, *.ps, *.prn files) on a USB drive.

You can disable / enable this function in the Settings Editor.

Illustration

[39] Example of a folder structure on the USB drive

Print a file from a USB drive

Chapter 6 - Prepare the print jobs 107 VarioPrint 6000 line

[40] Save a file to a different location

Procedure

1. Insert the USB drive into the USB port at the left-hand side of the control panel. 2. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [USB]. 3. Touch to browse through the directories on the USB drive. 4. Touch the file or files you want to print, or touch [Select] to select multiple files. 5. Touch [Print] to send the file to the list of [Scheduled jobs] immediately, or 6. Touch [Save] to save a copy of the file to another location on your printer such as the list of

[Waiting jobs] or a DocBox. Then you can edit the file first and print the file from the other location The locations you can select depend on your system configuration.

7. Touch the eject button . Remove the USB drive from the control panel when the USB LED on the control panel is off.

Print a file from a USB drive

108 Chapter 6 - Prepare the print jobs VarioPrint 6000 line

Print a page number via PRISMAsync

Introduction

You can print a page number on each page for PDF print jobs. Per job you can specify the position and alignment of the page number, the prefix, and the suffix of the page number.

You can also add a page number via PRISMAprepare. In PRISMAprepare you can also add a company logo, headers, and footers.

Before you begin

Define the font and the font size for the page number in the Settings Editor.

You can add page numbers via the job properties, see below, or via an automated workflow (AWF) in the Settings Editor.

Procedure

1. Touch [Jobs]. 2. Go to the location of the job. 3. Select the job to which you want to add page numbers. 4. Touch [Edit], or double-tap the job. 5. Touch the [Page numbering] tile to enter the required information for the page numbers.

Print a page number via PRISMAsync

Chapter 6 - Prepare the print jobs 109 VarioPrint 6000 line

Print a page number via PRISMAsync

110 Chapter 6 - Prepare the print jobs VarioPrint 6000 line

Chapter 7 Plan the workload remotely

PRISMAsync Remote Manager (optional) With PRISMAsync Remote Manager you can monitor printers, operate printers remotely and send jobs and ready-to-print documents to the printer queues of all configured printers. You must enable and configure PRISMAsync Remote Manager in the Settings Editor.

Refer to the user manual for the PRISMAsync Remote Manager for the options available when using this product.

PRISMAsync Remote Manager (optional)

112 Chapter 7 - Plan the workload remotely VarioPrint 6000 line

Use the Remote Control app to monitor printing The PRISMAsync Remote Control app helps you to stay informed about the print production on the available PRISMAsync printers. Even at a distance.

With PRISMAsync Remote Control on your smartphone, you see the status of your PRISMAsync driven printers at a glance. You receive alerts when operator actions, such as loading media or adding consumables, are foreseen. Or, in case a problem at the printer asks for an immediate action. PRISMAsync Remote Control helps you to keep your printers printing, even while you're doing other things.

The table below describes four screens of PRISMAsync Remote Control.

Description

1 The configuration screen has options to indicate how you want to be informed.

2 The start screen.

3 The printer list shows the status of the available printers.

4 The event list shows the upcoming actions and the current status of the available printers.

Refer to the quick reference guide of PRISMAsync Remote Control for the setup, possibilities, and use of this product.

Use the Remote Control app to monitor printing

Chapter 7 - Plan the workload remotely 113 VarioPrint 6000 line

Use the Remote Control app to monitor printing

114 Chapter 7 - Plan the workload remotely VarioPrint 6000 line

Chapter 8 Plan the jobs

Manage the jobs in the queue

Learn about job management in the queues The destination of a print job is determined when a job is submitted. However, the active workflow profile and the automated workflow can overrule the destination. Completed print jobs are stored in the list of printed jobs, if enabled.

This topic describes the following locations where jobs are found: List of waiting jobs DocBox List of scheduled jobs List of printed jobs

When the print system is in the transaction printing mode, PRISMAsync routes the streaming jobs directly to the list of scheduled jobs.

Waiting jobs

When jobs arrive in the list of waiting jobs, you determine the print order of the jobs. You are also able to change print job settings or perform page programming. With one of the selection functions you select the jobs and give the print command. The jobs are added to the list of scheduled jobs.

[41] List of waiting jobs

To increase the print productivity, you can use the job bundle function to combine several jobs into a single job. The original jobs are no longer visible, but you can recover the original jobs with

Manage the jobs in the queue

116 Chapter 8 - Plan the jobs VarioPrint 6000 line

the split function. You can change some settings and the print order of the individual jobs in the bundled job.

DocBox

The DocBox is a job destination to collect jobs before printing. DocBox folders make it easy to group jobs for example per job owner or per department. You can also create DocBox folders for jobs that must be printed according to specific requirements. The DocBox folder [Public] can be accessed by all operators.

[42] The DocBox folders

The system administrator can configure the DocBox settings in the Settings Editor.

Scheduled jobs

The print system prints the jobs in the sequence of the list of scheduled jobs. However, you are able to change the print sequence when one or more jobs require priority. In addition, you can decide to postpone or stop a print job.

The schedule gives you up to eight hours of plan-ahead predictability into the print production. It tells you everything you need to know to avoid an idle print system.

Learn about job management in the queues

Chapter 8 - Plan the jobs 117 VarioPrint 6000 line

[43] List of scheduled jobs

Printed jobs

When a job is ready, it is visible in the list of printed jobs. You must copy the printed job to the list of waiting jobs or a DocBox folder, before you can reprint the job. Printed jobs remain available after the print system is shut down. Proof prints or stopped jobs are not visible in the list of printed jobs.

Learn about job management in the queues

118 Chapter 8 - Plan the jobs VarioPrint 6000 line

[44] List of printed jobs

In the following situations, you are not able to reprint jobs: The list of printed jobs is disabled in the Settings Editor. The print system is in the transaction printing mode. PRISMAsync already removed the print jobs from the list.

Learn about job management in the queues

Chapter 8 - Plan the jobs 119 VarioPrint 6000 line

Search, filter and select jobs PRISMAsync Print Server offers a search, filter and select function to quickly find and easily select jobs at all available job locations.

Search function

The search function makes it possible to find jobs with a specific attribute, for example job name, media, or user.

[45] All jobs of a specific user in the list of waiting jobs.

Filter function

You can use the filter option to limit the amount of jobs to select from.

[46] The filter options in the list of waiting jobs

The filter function offers the following possibilities:

When you want to Filter option

Show only jobs that use certain media. [Used media] 4

Search, filter and select jobs

120 Chapter 8 - Plan the jobs VarioPrint 6000 line

When you want to Filter option

Show only jobs that use a certain output tray. [Output tray]

Show only jobs that use media that are in paper trays. [Loaded media]

Show only jobs that use a certain job label. [Job label]

Remove the filter and show all jobs. [None]

Select function

The select function enables you to perform an operation on all selected jobs in one go.

[47] The select options in the DoxBox

The select function offers the following possibilities:

When you want to Selection option

Select all jobs [All jobs]

Select the jobs that use media that are in the paper trays. [Jobs with loaded media]

Select jobs that are submitted with a certain automated workflow. The job label refers to the name of the automated workflow. A label is a name or tag that helps you to identify certain jobs on the control panel. When a job is sent to the printer, the person who submits the job can add a label to that job. The label can be any name that helps to identify certain jobs. The label can be de- fined in the printer driver, in a job ticket or via an automated work- flow. When the label in the printer driver is identical to a defined automated workflow, then the print job will be printed with the settings of this automated workflow. For example, the label Cus- tomer XYZ can be added to jobs. Then you can select and print all the jobs for 'Customer XYZ' at once.

[Job label]

Select printed jobs in DocBox folders. [Printed jobs]

Select new jobs in DocBox folders. [New jobs]

Unselect all jobs. [None] 4

Search, filter and select jobs

Chapter 8 - Plan the jobs 121 VarioPrint 6000 line

When you want to Selection option

Select the unselected jobs and unselect the selected jobs. [Invert selection]

Select a number of jobs manually. Touch the required jobs one by one.

Procedure

1. Touch [Jobs]. 2. Select the location

Touch [Queues] to go to the scheduled and waiting jobs. Touch or to go the list of waiting jobs or the list of scheduled jobs.

Touch [DocBox] to go to the DocBox folders. Touch [Printed jobs] to go to the printed jobs.

3. Use the search function to find jobs with a specific attribute. You can select all jobs found at once with the [All jobs] option.

4. Use the filter function to limit the amount of jobs to select from. You can select all jobs found at once with the [All jobs] option.

5. Use the select function or tab jobs to select and deselect jobs. Touch and hold a job to bring a multiple job selection back to one job.

Search, filter and select jobs

122 Chapter 8 - Plan the jobs VarioPrint 6000 line

Move jobs to another destination The destination of a print job is determined when a job is submitted. However, you can decide to move the job to another destination because you want to print a job later or want to store a job. You can also decide to store or reprint a printed job.

This topic describes how to: Move a job to a DocBox Move a job to the waiting jobs Make a copy and move a job Copy and move a printed job Forward a job to another printer

Move a job to a DocBox

Move the selected jobs to a different DocBox folder.

[48] Move waiting job to DocBox

You can move jobs to a DocBox folder from the following locations:

Function Scheduled jobs

Waiting jobs DocBox Printed jobs

[Move to DocBox]

1. Touch [Jobs]. 2. Go to the location of the job. 3. Select the jobs you want to move. 4. Touch [Move to DocBox]. 5. Select the required DocBox folder. 6. Touch [OK].

Move jobs to another destination

Chapter 8 - Plan the jobs 123 VarioPrint 6000 line

Move a job to the waiting jobs

Move the selected jobs to the list of waiting jobs

[49] Move scheduled job to waiting jobs

You can move jobs to the list of waiting jobs from the following locations:

Function Scheduled jobs

Waiting jobs DocBox Printed jobs

[Move to waiting jobs]

NOTE When you want to move the active job to the list of waiting jobs, you must first press the [Stop] button twice to stop the job.

1. Touch [Jobs]. 2. Go to the location of the job. 3. Select the jobs you want to move. 4. Touch [Move to waiting jobs].

Make a copy and move a printed job

Make a copy of a selected job and move the copy to a DocBox folder or the list of waiting jobs.

Move jobs to another destination

124 Chapter 8 - Plan the jobs VarioPrint 6000 line

[50] Copy printed job to DocBox or waiting jobs

You can copy and move printed jobs from the following location:

Function Scheduled jobs

Waiting jobs DocBox Printed jobs

[Copy to waiting jobs]

[Copy to DocBox]

1. Touch [Jobs][Printed jobs]. 2. Select the jobs you want to copy and move. 3. Select the location for the selected jobs:

Touch [Copy to waiting jobs] to make a copy and move the job to the list of waiting jobs. Touch [Copy to DocBox] to make a copy and move the job to a DocBox folder.

Select the DocBox folder and touch [OK].

Forward a job to another printer

The system administrator can configure the forward function and list of other printers in the Settings Editor. Location: [Workflow][Remote printers]. The forward function also shows the printers managed with Remote Manager.

Forwarded jobs keep their original properties that were defined during submission.

NOTE When one or more settings or finishing options for the job are not available on the selected remote printer, a warning icon is displayed in the job on the remote printer. The job on the remote printer indicates that there are contradictions you must resolve.

Move jobs to another destination

Chapter 8 - Plan the jobs 125 VarioPrint 6000 line

[51] Forward job to another printer

You can forward jobs from the following locations:

Function Scheduled jobs

Waiting jobs DocBox Printed jobs

[Forward]

1. Touch [Jobs][Printed jobs]. 2. Go to the location of the job. 3. Select the jobs you want to send to another printer, or use an option from the [Select] menu

to select multiple jobs together. 4. Touch [Forward]. 5. Select a printer from the list or use [Other printer] to manually enter a printer name.

[52] Forward job to another printer

Move jobs to another destination

126 Chapter 8 - Plan the jobs VarioPrint 6000 line

6. Touch [OK].

Move jobs to another destination

Chapter 8 - Plan the jobs 127 VarioPrint 6000 line

Schedule a Waiting Job for Printing

Introduction

The selected workflow determines the destination of jobs. When jobs go to the list of [Waiting jobs], you must manually send the jobs to the print queue (list of [Scheduled jobs]). This enables you to keep full control of all jobs that must be printed.

Procedure

1. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [Queues]. 2. If collapsed, first touch to expand the desired list of [Waiting jobs]. 3. Touch the job(s) you want to print, or use the [Select] button to make a selection.

To undo the multiple selection and only select one job, you must touch and hold that job for two seconds.

4. Press [Print]. The job is moved to the bottom of the list of [Scheduled jobs].

Schedule a Waiting Job for Printing

128 Chapter 8 - Plan the jobs VarioPrint 6000 line

Print an Urgent Job Immediately

Introduction

When a job must be printed urgently, you can give that print job priority over all other print jobs. The [Print now] button allows you to print a job immediately. When you use the [Print now] button, the active print job will be paused as soon as the current set is ready.

To print a job as soon as possible but not immediately, you can use the [Move to top] function.

Locations of the [Print now] Button

The [Print now] button is available at the following locations. List of [Scheduled jobs]. DocBox (optional).

NOTE To give priority to a job in the list of [Waiting jobs], you must first touch [Print] to send the job to the list of [Scheduled jobs]. There you can select the job and touch [Print now]. To give priority to a job in the list of [Printed jobs], you must first reprint the job. The job is sent to the list of [Waiting jobs]. From there, you must send the job to the list of [Scheduled jobs]. There you can select the job and touch [Print now].

Procedure

1. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [Queues]. 2. If collapsed, first touch to expand the list of [Scheduled jobs]. 3. Touch the job which you want to print immediately. 4. Press [Print now].

The urgent job appears at the top of the list of [Scheduled jobs]. The active print job is paused as soon as the current set is ready and becomes second in the list.

Print an Urgent Job Immediately

Chapter 8 - Plan the jobs 129 VarioPrint 6000 line

Give Priority to a Print Job

Introduction

When you want to print a job as soon as possible, but not necessarily immediately, you must use the [Move to top] function. The [Move to top] function moves the selected job to the second position in the list of [Scheduled jobs], below the active print job . The job will be printed when the active print job is ready.

Procedure

1. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [Queues]. 2. If collapsed, first touch to expand the list of [Scheduled jobs]. 3. Touch the job to which you want to give priority. 4. Press [Move to top].

Give Priority to a Print Job

130 Chapter 8 - Plan the jobs VarioPrint 6000 line

Print a scheduled job later

Introduction

The machine prints the jobs that are present in the list of [Scheduled jobs] jobs.

However, you can decide to print a job later, for example because: The required media are out of stock, or You first want to make a proof.

Then you must move the job back to the list of [Waiting jobs].

NOTE To select the active print job you must first press the Stop button 2x to stop the job.

Procedure

1. Touch [Jobs] -> [Queues]. 2. If collapsed, first touch to expand the list of [Scheduled jobs]. 3. Touch the job or jobs you want to print later or use the [Select] button to make a selection.

To undo the multiple selection and only select 1 job, you must touch that job for 2 seconds. 4. Press [Move].

The job is moved to the list of [Waiting jobs].

Print a scheduled job later

Chapter 8 - Plan the jobs 131 VarioPrint 6000 line

Combine jobs in the list of [Waiting jobs] (bundle function)

Introduction

The bundle function allows you to combine two or more jobs into one new job. For example, this can be convenient when the participants of a meeting need several documents in a specific order. Often, the required documents are sent from several workplaces to the printer in advance. Normally, this means that you must print the documents first and sort or staple them later. By using the bundle function you can determine the order of the documents before printing and print all documents in the correct order in only one print job.

Important information about the bundle function

You can only bundle print jobs that are currently in the list of [Waiting jobs]. You can change a number of settings for the bundled job via the [Edit] window. By default, the number of sets for a bundled job is one. So before printing, you must first

indicate the required number of sets. When you stop a job after a set, the printing stops after one copy of the complete bundle. The jobs in a bundle are accounted separately under the account ID of the original jobs. All the jobs in the bundle must have the same output location. Otherwise, the control panel

displays a warning message. To continue, you must first split the bundled job, then change the individual job settings and finally bundle the jobs again.

Main actions on the bundle function

The table below describes the main actions you can carry out with regard to the bundle function.

Main bundle functions

Main actions Description

[Bundle] When you touch [Bundle] after selecting two or more jobs, a new job is created that contains the original jobs. The new job is added to the bottom of the list of [Waiting jobs]. The original jobs are re- moved from the list. The new job gets a new name that is based on the name of the first job in the bundle.

[Split] When you touch [Split] after selecting a bundled job, the job is split into the original, separate jobs. The bundled job is removed. The separate jobs are added to the bottom of the list of [Waiting jobs]. You can use the [Split] function to correct mismatched set- tings, for example.

Change job settings The [Edit] window gives access to a pane where you can do the following. Change the job name. Change a number of job settings. Change the order of the jobs in the bundle.

Combine jobs in the list of [Waiting jobs] (bundle function)

132 Chapter 8 - Plan the jobs VarioPrint 6000 line

Illustration

[53] Properties of a bundle job

Procedure

1. Go to the list of waiting jobs. 2. Touch the jobs you want to combine, or use an option from the [Select] menu to select multiple

jobs at once. 3. Touch [Bundle].

A window appears that allows you to make some changes. 4. If necessary, use the [Up] and [Down] buttons to change the job order. 5. If necessary, change the generic job settings, such as [Number of bundles]. 6. Touch [OK].

The job is in the list.

[54] Bundle job

Combine jobs in the list of [Waiting jobs] (bundle function)

Chapter 8 - Plan the jobs 133 VarioPrint 6000 line

Define default use of special pages This topic describes the following instructions. 1. Define banner pages 2. Define trailer pages 3. Define the default media of banner and trailer pages 4. Define the default media of separator sheets

What are special pages

Banner pages, trailer pages and separator sheets are special pages that can be added to a job. The Settings Editor has options to configure the use of special pages.

NOTE You can import and export the media definition of special pages.

Define banner pages

1. Open the Settings Editor and go to: [Preferences][System settings][Basic]

[55] [System settings] tab

2. Use the [Banner pages for copy jobs] and [Banner pages for print jobs] options to indicate the use of banner pages. [Enabled]: banner pages are added to all jobs. [Disabled]: banner pages are never added to the jobs.

[56] Banner pages for copy jobs

[57] Banner pages for print jobs

3. Click [OK]. 4. Use the [Media of banner / trailer pages] option to define how the media of banner pages are

selected.

Define default use of special pages

134 Chapter 8 - Plan the jobs VarioPrint 6000 line

[Use job media]: the banner pages are printed on job media. [Use default media]: the banner pages are printed on default media.

5. Click [OK].

Define trailer pages

1. Open the Settings Editor and go to: [Preferences][System settings][Basic].

[58] [System settings] tab

2. Use the [Trailer pages for copy jobs] and [Trailer pages for print jobs] options to indicate the use of trailer pages. [Enabled]: trailer pages are added to all jobs. [Disabled]: trailer pages are never added to the jobs.

[59] Trailer pages for copy jobs

----------------------------------------------

[60] Trailer pages for print jobs

3. Click [OK]. 4. Use the [Media of banner / trailer pages] option to define how the media of trailer pages are

selected. [Use job media]: the trailer pages are printed on job media.

Define default use of special pages

Chapter 8 - Plan the jobs 135 VarioPrint 6000 line

[Use default media]: the trailer pages are printed on default media.

Define the default media of banner and trailer pages

Define the default media of banner and trailer pages when you have selected [Use default media] in the [Media of banner / trailer pages] option. 1. Open the Settings Editor and go to: [Preferences][Print job defaults].

[61] Media setting for banner pages, trailer pages, and tickets

2. Use the [Media of banner pages, trailer pages, and tickets] option to select the default media of banner and trailer pages.

[62] Default media of banner pages, trailer pages and tickets

3. Click [OK].

Define the default media of separator sheets

1. Open the Settings Editor and go to: [Preferences][Print job defaults].

Define default use of special pages

136 Chapter 8 - Plan the jobs VarioPrint 6000 line

[63] Media setting for separator sheets

2. Use the [Media of separator sheets] option to select the default media of the separator sheets.

[64] Default media of separator sheets

3. Click [OK]. 4. Use the [Separator sheets] option to select the sheet orientation of the separation sheets.

[Short-edge feed]: separator sheets are delivered in the output tray with short-edge feed direction.

[Long-edge feed]: separator sheets are delivered in the output tray with long-edge feed direction.

[Automatic]: separator sheets are delivered in the output tray as defined for the job.

5. Click [OK].

Define default use of special pages

Chapter 8 - Plan the jobs 137 VarioPrint 6000 line

Create a note for the operator You can create a note for the operator on several locations. A job that has a note for the operator has the following symbol.

Function Scheduled jobs

Waiting jobs DocBox Printed jobs

[Note for operator]

1. Touch the job. 2. In the [Original] settings, touch [Note for operator]. 3. Press [Edit].

4. Type a message for the operator.

Create a note for the operator

138 Chapter 8 - Plan the jobs VarioPrint 6000 line

5. Touch [OK].

Create a note for the operator

Chapter 8 - Plan the jobs 139 VarioPrint 6000 line

Use the DocBox (Option)

The DocBox function

Introduction to the DocBox Function

Introduction

DocBox is short for Document Box. The DocBox function, which is available through the control panel, creates a buffer between the preparation of a job and the printing of the job. The DocBox supports the operator by offering comprehensive means to store, group, edit and reprint documents.

A DocBox can contain the following jobs: Print jobs

NOTE In the Settings Editor, the system administrator can create as many DocBoxes as required, for example a DocBox for each individual customer or department.

Illustration

[65] The starting page for DocBox jobs

Use the DocBox (Option)

140 Chapter 8 - Plan the jobs VarioPrint 6000 line

When to Use the DocBox

For example: To correct settings when the proof print is not correct, for example change the print quality or

layout of a document. To combine analogue documents with digital documents. To store jobs that must be reprinted regularly, for examples reports or books.

Introduction to the DocBox Function

Chapter 8 - Plan the jobs 141 VarioPrint 6000 line

Create a New DocBox

Illustration

[66] Create a DocBox

Procedure

NOTE Only the System Administrator is allowed to create a new DocBox in the Settings Editor.

1. Open your web browser and enter the host name or IP address of the PRISMAsync controller. 2. Log on to the Settings Editor as System Administrator. 3. Select [Workflow] -> [DocBox]. 4. Click [Add]. 5. Enter a new DocBox name. Identical DocBoxes are not allowed. 6. If you want to secure the new DocBox with a PIN, set [PIN enabled] to [Yes] and enter a PIN to

secure the DocBox. Each time you access this DocBox through the control panel, you must enter this PIN.

7. Confirm the PIN. 8. Click [OK].

Create a New DocBox

142 Chapter 8 - Plan the jobs VarioPrint 6000 line

Handle the Jobs in a DocBox

Overview of the Available Settings for DocBox Jobs

Introduction

When you select a job in a DocBox and touch [Edit], the current settings of the selected job are displayed. Below, the available settings are described.

NOTE Depending on the type of job you want to edit some settings cannot be changed. When a setting cannot be changed, the setting is greyed out.

Preview the job settings for PDF print jobs

For PDF print jobs a realistic preview is displayed in the job properties. For other jobs a general preview is displayed indicating most of the settings.

1. View the result of the job and imposition settings in the sheet view . 2. Touch the icon and browse the document. 3. View how the document will look after printing in the document view . 4. Use the zoom function to view specific details.

Handle the Jobs in a DocBox

Chapter 8 - Plan the jobs 143 VarioPrint 6000 line

Change the job settings

[1- or 2-sided]

Setting Values Description

[1- or 2-sided]

[1-sided]

The output contains an image on one side.

[2-sided]

The output contains an image on both sides.

Overview of the Available Settings for DocBox Jobs

144 Chapter 8 - Plan the jobs VarioPrint 6000 line

[Binding edge]

Setting Values Description

[Binding edge] [Portrait]

[Left] The original has a vertical format (height > width).

The binding edge is at the left-hand side. The left-hand side of a page is bound to the right-hand side of the previous page

When you turn a sheet over the binding edge, the image or text on the back of the sheet is in readable form.

[Right] The original has a vertical format (height > width).

The binding edge is at the right-hand side. The right-hand side of a page is bound to the left-hand side of the previous side.

When you turn a sheet over the binding edge, the image or text on the back of the sheet is in readable form.

[Top, head to toe] The original has a vertical format (height > width).

Binding edge: the top side of a page is bound to the bottom side of the previous page.

When you turn a sheet over the binding edge, the image or text on the back of the sheet is in readable form.

Calendar mode

[Top, head to head] The original has a vertical format (height > width).

Binding edge: the top side of a page is bound to the top side of the previous page.

When you turn a sheet over the binding edge the image or text on the back side of the sheet is upside down.

[Bottom] The original has a vertical format (height > width).

Binding edge: the bottom side of a page is bound to the bottom side of the previous page.

When you turn a sheet over the binding edge, the image or text on the back of the sheet is in readable form. 4

Overview of the Available Settings for DocBox Jobs

Chapter 8 - Plan the jobs 145 VarioPrint 6000 line

Setting Values Description

[Binding edge] [Landscape]

[Left] The original has a horizontal format (width > height).

The binding edge is at the left-hand side. The left-hand side of a page is bound to the right-hand side of the previous page

When you turn a sheet over the binding edge, the image or text on the back of the sheet is in readable form.

[Right] The original has a horizontal format (width > height).

The binding edge is at the right-hand side. The right-hand side of a page is bound to the left-hand side of the previous side.

When you turn a sheet over the binding edge, the image or text on the back of the sheet is in readable form.

[Top, head to toe] The original has a horizontal format (width > height).

Binding edge: the top side of a page is bound to the bottom side of the previous page.

When you turn a sheet over the binding edge, the image or text on the back of the sheet is in readable form.

Calendar mode

[Top, head to head] The original has a horizontal format (width > height).

Binding edge: the top side of a page is bound to the top side of the previous page.

When you turn a sheet over the binding edge the image or text on the back side of the sheet is upside down.

[Bottom] The original has a horizontal format (width > height).

Binding edge: the bottom side of a page is bound to the bottom side of the previous page.

When you turn a sheet over the binding edge, the image or text on the back of the sheet is in readable form.

Overview of the Available Settings for DocBox Jobs

146 Chapter 8 - Plan the jobs VarioPrint 6000 line

[Media]

Setting Values Description

[Media]

Names of the media in the media catalogue

Here you can select the media for the job. The list displays all the media that are available in the media catalog including the temporary me- dia. The media catalog is a list of media that you can define in the Settings Editor.

NOTE You can only change to media with the same size, for example, from A4 blue to A4 green.

[Cover]

Setting Values Description

[Cover]

[Front cover]

Touch the button to toggle between [On] and [Off]. When [Front cover] is [On] then the [Me- dia] setting below [Front cover] becomes ena- bled.

[Media] When [Front cover] is [On], you can select a media from the media catalog to use as front cover.

[Print sides] When [Front cover] is [On], you can indicate which side of the front cover must be printed. You can select. [Both sides] [Front side] [Back side] [None]

[Back cover]

Touch the button to toggle between [On] and [Off]. When [Back cover] is [On] then the [Me- dia] setting below [Back cover] becomes ena- bled.

[Media] When [Back cover] is [On], you can select a media from the media catalogue to use as back cover.

[Print sides] When [Back cover] is [On], you can indicate which side of the back cover must be printed. You can select: [Both sides] [Front side] [Back side] [None]

Overview of the Available Settings for DocBox Jobs

Chapter 8 - Plan the jobs 147 VarioPrint 6000 line

[Layout]

Name of the setting Available options Description

[Layout]

[Multiple up]

The machine prints 2, 4, 6, 9 or 16 consecutive images on 1 side of a sheet. By default, the system keeps the size of the originals. If neces- sary, use the Zoom function to reduce or en- large the size of the images.

[Booklet]

The printer prints the pages in booklet order. The pages 1 and 4 are printed on the front side of a sheet. The pages 2 and 3 are printed on the back side of a sheet.

[Same up]

The printer prints the same image 2, 4, 6, 9 or 16 times on 1 side of a sheet. By default, the system keeps the size of the originals. If neces- sary, use the Zoom function to reduce or en- large the size of the images. [2, rotate]: The printer prints the same image two times on 1 side of a sheet. The images are rotated compared to each other. By default, the system keeps the size of the originals. If necessary, use the Zoom function to reduce or enlarge the size of the images.

[Zoom]

Setting Values Description

[Zoom] [Fit to page] When [Fit to page] is [On], the image is resized so it fits onto the page. When [Fit to page] is [Off], the original size of the image is maintained.

[Percent] Use the + and - buttons to reduce or enlarge the size of the image (from 25% to 400%). The preview pane immediately shows the results of your ac- tion.

Overview of the Available Settings for DocBox Jobs

148 Chapter 8 - Plan the jobs VarioPrint 6000 line

[Align]

Setting Values Description

[Align]

[Top left]

An image on a sheet may be smaller than the media size of the output, for example because you scaled the image to 70% of its original size. The [Align] setting allows you to indicate the position of the image on the sheet. [Top left] moves the image to the upper left corner of the sheet.

[Top center]

[Top center] moves the image to the center at the top of the sheet.

[Top right]

[Top right] moves the image to the upper right corner of the sheet.

[Center left]

[Center left] moves the image to center of the left side of the sheet.

[Center]

[Center] moves the image to the center of the sheet.

[Center right]

[Center right] moves the image to the center of the right side of the sheet.

[Bottom left]

[Bottom left] moves the image to the lower left corner of the sheet.

[Bottom center]

[Bottom center] moves the image to the center of the bottom side of the sheet.

[Bottom right]

[Bottom right] moves the image to the lower right corner of the sheet.

Overview of the Available Settings for DocBox Jobs

Chapter 8 - Plan the jobs 149 VarioPrint 6000 line

[Shift]

Setting Values Description

[Shift] [Margin shift] Use this setting to increase or decrease the margin. By default, the values of the front side and the back side are interlocked. This means that the values for the front side and the back side remain identical. Widening the margin can be useful if you want to staple or punch the output, for example. Narrowing the margin can be useful if you do not need additional space for stapling or punching the output, for example. By default, the front side and the back side are linked . Then the image on both sides will be shifted the same amount. Touch to terminate the link and shift each side individually.

[Image shift] Use this setting to shift the image horizontally or vertically. By default, the values of the front side and the back side are interlocked. This means that the values for the front side and the back side remain identical. By default, the front side and the back side are linked . Then the image on both sides will be shifted the same amount. Touch to terminate the link and shift each side individually.

Overview of the Available Settings for DocBox Jobs

150 Chapter 8 - Plan the jobs VarioPrint 6000 line

[Print delivery]

Setting Values Description

[Print delivery] [Output tray] Select the output location for the job. Depend- ing on the settings for your job, the machine automatically suggests the preferred output lo- cation for your job. However, you can manual- ly overrule this suggestion.

[Sort]

[By page] The output is sorted by page.

[By set] The output is sorted by set.

[Offset stacking] This setting is only available when the [Offset stacking] setting is set to [As in job] in the workflow profile.

[Each set] Each set delivered to an output location will have a small shift on top of the previous set. This makes it easier to recognize individual sets.

[Off] All the sets or jobs that get to an output loca- tion are stacked in a straight stack.

[Advanced settings] It may only be necessary to change the ad- vanced settings when an offline finisher pro- cesses sheets in a non-standard way. Please refer to the finisher manuals for more informa- tion. 4

Overview of the Available Settings for DocBox Jobs

Chapter 8 - Plan the jobs 151 VarioPrint 6000 line

Setting Values Description

[Print delivery] [Advanced settings]

[Sheet order]

[Face up] Deliver the prints face up, first sheet on top.

[Face up reverse] Deliver the prints face up, last sheet on top.

[Face down] Deliver the prints face down, first sheet on top.

[Face down reverse] Deliver the prints face down, last sheet on top.

[Sheet orientation]

[Header up LEF] Deliver the prints with the header on top side and in portrait position (vertical).

[Header up SEF] Deliver the prints with the header on top side and in landscape position (horizontal).

[Header down LEF] Deliver the prints with the header at the bot- tom side and in portrait position (vertical).

[Header down SEF] Deliver the prints with the header at the bot- tom side and in landscape position (horizon- tal). 4

Overview of the Available Settings for DocBox Jobs

152 Chapter 8 - Plan the jobs VarioPrint 6000 line

Setting Values Description

[Print delivery] [Advanced settings]

[Print order] [Front/back] Default value. The front page on the front, the back page on the back.

[Back/front] Puts the front page on the back and the back page on the front.

[Rotation] [0 degrees] [180 degrees]

Rotates the prints 180 degrees.

[Margin erase]

Setting Values Description

[Margin erase]

Numbers Indicate if you want to erase the margins of the im- age. When you adjust the [Margin erase] you erase areas of the image, with a maximum of 100 mm / 3.94".

[Print quality]

Setting Values Description

[Print quality] [Brightness] (default 0)

When your prints are too dark or too light, changing the brightness can correct this prob- lem. -1 to -3 creates darker prints. +1 to +3 creates lighter prints.

[Contrast] (default 0) When the difference between light and dark areas of a print is not big enough, you can change the contrast to correct this problem. Example: When a blue text is displayed ras- tered, you can increase the contrast to make the text more black and sharper.

[Binding]

Setting Values Description

[Binding] Here you can define how to bind your document, for example where to put the staple. The available options depend on the finishers present. Check the preview for the result of the selection.

Overview of the Available Settings for DocBox Jobs

Chapter 8 - Plan the jobs 153 VarioPrint 6000 line

[Number of sets]

Setting Values Description

[Number of sets] [Check first set] When the [Check first set] setting is enabled, the printer stops after the first set of a job has been printed. You can check the quality of the output.

NOTE This setting is only available when in the workflow profile [Check first set] is set to [As in job].

[Number of sets] You can indicate how many copies of the job you need. You can enter a value from 1 - 65,000. The default value is 1.

[Job name]

Setting Values Description

[Job name] To identify your job more easily, you can change the name of the job. When you touch the [Job name] button a keyboard appears. Then you can change the name of the job.

[Print range]

Setting Values Description

[Print range] [All] When [All] is selected, all pages or records of the job will be printed.

[Page range] When [Page range] is selected, you can indi- cate the first page and the last page that must be printed in the [From] and [To] fields.

[Record range] When [Record range] is selected, you can indi- cate the first record and the last record that must be printed in the [From] and [To] fields.

Overview of the Available Settings for DocBox Jobs

154 Chapter 8 - Plan the jobs VarioPrint 6000 line

[Special pages]

Setting Values Description

[Special pages] Banner pages, trailer pages, and separator sheets

[Overrule default banner / trailer page set tings]: indicate if you want to overrule the default banner page, trailer page, and sepa- rator sheets settings.

[Use a banner page]: indicate if the job must include a banner page. The banner page contains: the sender name, the recipient name, the accounting ID, the job name, the printer name, the operator in- struction, the cost centre and the number of sets.

[Use a trailer page]: indicate if the job must include a trailer page. The trailer page contains: the username, the recipient name, accounting ID, the job name, the printer name, the operator in- struction, the number of pages in a set, the number of sets, the number of staples, the number of folded sheets, the number of punched sheets, the number of creased sheets, the number of inserts, job received time, job start time, job completion time, the number of sheets per job media.

[Media of banner/trailer page]: define the media for the banner and trailer page.

[Use separator sheets ]: indicate the use of separator sheets to separate job sets. Sepa- rator sheets are not printed.

[Separator sheet after N sets]: define after how many sets you want a separator sheet.

[Media of separator sheets]: define the me- dia for the separator sheet.

Overview of the Available Settings for DocBox Jobs

Chapter 8 - Plan the jobs 155 VarioPrint 6000 line

[Page numbering]

This setting is only available for PDF jobs.

Setting Values Description

[Page numbering]

[On] Print a page number on each page of the job.

[Off] No page number on each page of the job.

[Location] [Top left, alternating] [Top center] [Top right, alternating] [Bottom left, alternat- ing] [Bottom center] [Bottom right, alter- nating]

The position of the page number on the page.

[Start with page num- ber]

The number with which the page numbering starts.

[Text before page number] [Text after page num- ber]

The text that is printed before or after the page number.

Overview of the Available Settings for DocBox Jobs

156 Chapter 8 - Plan the jobs VarioPrint 6000 line

Edit a Job in a DocBox

Procedure

1. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [DocBox]. 2. Touch the DocBox that contains the job you want to edit. 3. Touch the job you want to edit. 4. Touch [Edit], or double-tap the job to open the [Edit] window. 5. Change the required settings. 6. Touch [OK].

Edit a Job in a DocBox

Chapter 8 - Plan the jobs 157 VarioPrint 6000 line

Combine Jobs in a DocBox (Build Function)

Introduction

You can combine a job in a DocBox with other jobs from the same DocBox. The system creates a new job from the selected jobs. The icon indicates a built job.

NOTE You cannot combine PDF jobs with non-PDF jobs.

Illustration

[67] Properties of a build job

Procedure

1. Go to the DocBox that contains the jobs you want to combine. 2. Touch the jobs you want to combine, or use an option from the [Select] menu to select multiple

jobs at once. 3. Touch the [Build] button or select [Build] from the drop-down menu.

A [Create build] window appears that allows you to make some changes. 4. If necessary, use the [Up] and [Down] buttons to change the job order. 5. If necessary, change the generic job settings, such as [Number of sets]. 6. Touch [OK].

The job is in the list.

[68] Build job

Combine Jobs in a DocBox (Build Function)

158 Chapter 8 - Plan the jobs VarioPrint 6000 line

Split a Combined Job in the DocBox

Introduction

You can split a combined job in the DocBox into the original separate jobs. Then the system restores the jobs with their original settings and status. You cannot split a combined job in the list of Waiting jobs.

NOTE You can only split a job when the job is not locked. Otherwise, you must unlock the job first.

Procedure

1. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [DocBox]. 2. Touch the DocBox that contains the job you want to split. 3. Touch the job you want to split. 4. Touch the [Split] button, or select [Split] from the drop-down menu.

The DocBox displays the original jobs.

Split a Combined Job in the DocBox

Chapter 8 - Plan the jobs 159 VarioPrint 6000 line

Lock a job in a DocBox

Introduction

The DocBox allows you to lock the settings of your jobs. Advantages: Settings cannot be changed accidentally. The job is always printed exactly the same.

Illustration

[69] The lock function in DocBox

Procedure

1. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [DocBox]. 2. Touch the DocBox that contains the job you want to lock. 3. Touch one or more jobs that you want to lock, or use an option from the [Select] menu to select

multiple jobs at once. 4. From the drop-down menu, select [Lock].

indicates that the job is locked.

Lock a job in a DocBox

160 Chapter 8 - Plan the jobs VarioPrint 6000 line

Unlock a Job in a DocBox

Introduction

Unlocking a job can be required if you want to split a locked, combined job into the original jobs, for example. Or if you want to change the settings of a locked job.

Procedure

1. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [DocBox]. 2. Touch the DocBox that contains the job you want to unlock. 3. Touch the job that you want to unlock. 4. From the drop-down menu, select [Unlock].

Unlock a Job in a DocBox

Chapter 8 - Plan the jobs 161 VarioPrint 6000 line

Move a Job from One DocBox to Another DocBox

Procedure

1. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [DocBox]. 2. Touch the DocBox button that contains the job you want to move. 3. Select the jobs you want to move. 4. Touch [Move to DocBox]. 5. Select the destination. 6. Touch [OK].

Move a Job from One DocBox to Another DocBox

162 Chapter 8 - Plan the jobs VarioPrint 6000 line

Print the Jobs in a DocBox

Print a Non-Urgent Job from the DocBox

Introduction

You can print jobs from the DocBox in two ways: Without urgency

The system sends the print job to the bottom of the list of [Scheduled jobs]. With urgency (immediately)

The system sends the print job to the top of the list of [Scheduled jobs]. The job currently active is put on hold.

Procedure

1. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [DocBox]. 2. Touch the DocBox that contains the job you want to print. 3. Touch the desired job. 4. Touch [Print] to print the non-urgent job.

Print the Jobs in a DocBox

Chapter 8 - Plan the jobs 163 VarioPrint 6000 line

Print an Urgent Job from the DocBox Immediately

Introduction

You can print jobs from the DocBox in two ways: Without urgency

The system sends the print job to the bottom of the list of [Scheduled jobs]. With urgency (immediately)

The system sends the print job to the top of the list of [Scheduled jobs]. The job currently active is put on hold.

Procedure

1. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [DocBox]. 2. Touch the DocBox that contains the job you want to print. 3. Touch the desired job. 4. Touch [Print now] to print the urgent job immediately.

Print an Urgent Job from the DocBox Immediately

164 Chapter 8 - Plan the jobs VarioPrint 6000 line

Chapter 9 Carry out print jobs

Change the print job settings on the control panel

Description of the print job settings that you can change on the control panel

Introduction

Usually, the settings for a print job is defined in PDLs, applications, printer drivers, automated workflows, or hotfolder default tickets. However, when a job has arrived on the PRISMAsync controller, you can change a number of job settings for all jobs that are currently not being printed. This section gives an overview of the print job settings that you can change on the control panel.

With the [Edit] button you view and partly change the job settings of the jobs in the following queues. [Waiting jobs] [Scheduled jobs]

You cannot change the settings of an active job. [Printed jobs] (view settings only)

You can partly define the following settings for the jobs in the list of [Waiting jobs] and the list of [Scheduled jobs]. The characteristics of the output Generic settings that apply to the whole job.

Preview the job settings for PDF print jobs

For PDF print jobs a realistic preview is displayed in the job properties. For other jobs a general preview is displayed indicating most of the settings.

Change the print job settings on the control panel

166 Chapter 9 - Carry out print jobs VarioPrint 6000 line

1. View the result of the job and imposition settings in the sheet view . 2. Touch the icon and browse the document. 3. View how the document will look after printing in the document view . 4. Use the zoom function to view specific details.

Description of the print job settings that you can change on the control panel

Chapter 9 - Carry out print jobs 167 VarioPrint 6000 line

Change the job settings

Pane Description

[Original] The [Original] pane shows general job information

[Output] The [Output] pane shows the output settings you can define for the whole job

[Job] The [Job] pane shows the general settings you can define for the job

Preview The preview displays the settings you defined for the output.

Action buttons The action buttons indicate the actions you can carry out.

[1- or 2-sided]

Setting Values Description

[1- or 2-sided]

[1-sided]

The output contains an image on one side.

[2-sided]

The output contains an image on both sides.

Description of the print job settings that you can change on the control panel

168 Chapter 9 - Carry out print jobs VarioPrint 6000 line

[Binding edge]

Setting Values Description

[Binding edge] [Portrait]

[Left] The original has a vertical format (height > width).

The binding edge is at the left-hand side. The left-hand side of a page is bound to the right-hand side of the previous page

When you turn a sheet over the binding edge, the image or text on the back of the sheet is in readable form.

[Right] The original has a vertical format (height > width).

The binding edge is at the right-hand side. The right-hand side of a page is bound to the left-hand side of the previous side.

When you turn a sheet over the binding edge, the image or text on the back of the sheet is in readable form.

[Top, head to toe] The original has a vertical format (height > width).

Binding edge: the top side of a page is bound to the bottom side of the previous page.

When you turn a sheet over the binding edge, the image or text on the back of the sheet is in readable form.

Calendar mode

[Top, head to head] The original has a vertical format (height > width).

Binding edge: the top side of a page is bound to the top side of the previous page.

When you turn a sheet over the binding edge the image or text on the back side of the sheet is upside down.

[Bottom] The original has a vertical format (height > width).

Binding edge: the bottom side of a page is bound to the bottom side of the previous page.

When you turn a sheet over the binding edge, the image or text on the back of the sheet is in readable form. 4

Description of the print job settings that you can change on the control panel

Chapter 9 - Carry out print jobs 169 VarioPrint 6000 line

Setting Values Description

[Binding edge] [Landscape]

[Left] The original has a horizontal format (width > height).

The binding edge is at the left-hand side. The left-hand side of a page is bound to the right-hand side of the previous page

When you turn a sheet over the binding edge, the image or text on the back of the sheet is in readable form.

[Right] The original has a horizontal format (width > height).

The binding edge is at the right-hand side. The right-hand side of a page is bound to the left-hand side of the previous side.

When you turn a sheet over the binding edge, the image or text on the back of the sheet is in readable form.

[Top, head to toe] The original has a horizontal format (width > height).

Binding edge: the top side of a page is bound to the bottom side of the previous page.

When you turn a sheet over the binding edge, the image or text on the back of the sheet is in readable form.

Calendar mode

[Top, head to head] The original has a horizontal format (width > height).

Binding edge: the top side of a page is bound to the top side of the previous page.

When you turn a sheet over the binding edge the image or text on the back side of the sheet is upside down.

[Bottom] The original has a horizontal format (width > height).

Binding edge: the bottom side of a page is bound to the bottom side of the previous page.

When you turn a sheet over the binding edge, the image or text on the back of the sheet is in readable form.

Description of the print job settings that you can change on the control panel

170 Chapter 9 - Carry out print jobs VarioPrint 6000 line

[Media]

Setting Values Description

[Media]

Names of the media in the media catalogue

Here you can select the media for the job. The list displays all the media that are available in the media catalog including the temporary me- dia. The media catalog is a list of media that you can define in the Settings Editor.

NOTE You can only change to media with the same size, for example, from A4 blue to A4 green.

[Cover]

Setting Values Description

[Cover]

[Front cover]

Touch the button to toggle between [On] and [Off]. When [Front cover] is [On] then the [Me- dia] setting below [Front cover] becomes ena- bled.

[Media] When [Front cover] is [On], you can select a media from the media catalog to use as front cover.

[Print sides] When [Front cover] is [On], you can indicate which side of the front cover must be printed. You can select. [Both sides] [Front side] [Back side] [None]

[Back cover]

Touch the button to toggle between [On] and [Off]. When [Back cover] is [On] then the [Me- dia] setting below [Back cover] becomes ena- bled.

[Media] When [Back cover] is [On], you can select a media from the media catalogue to use as back cover.

[Print sides] When [Back cover] is [On], you can indicate which side of the back cover must be printed. You can select: [Both sides] [Front side] [Back side] [None]

Description of the print job settings that you can change on the control panel

Chapter 9 - Carry out print jobs 171 VarioPrint 6000 line

[Layout]

Name of the setting Available options Description

[Layout]

[Multiple up]

The machine prints 2, 4, 6, 9 or 16 consecutive images on 1 side of a sheet. By default, the system keeps the size of the originals. If neces- sary, use the Zoom function to reduce or en- large the size of the images.

[Booklet]

The printer prints the pages in booklet order. The pages 1 and 4 are printed on the front side of a sheet. The pages 2 and 3 are printed on the back side of a sheet.

[Same up]

The printer prints the same image 2, 4, 6, 9 or 16 times on 1 side of a sheet. By default, the system keeps the size of the originals. If neces- sary, use the Zoom function to reduce or en- large the size of the images. [2, rotate]: The printer prints the same image two times on 1 side of a sheet. The images are rotated compared to each other. By default, the system keeps the size of the originals. If necessary, use the Zoom function to reduce or enlarge the size of the images.

[Zoom]

Name of the setting Available options Description

[Zoom] [Fit to page] When [Fit to page] is [On], the image is resized so it fits onto the page. When [Fit to page] is [Off], the original size of the image is maintained.

[Percent] Use the + and - buttons to reduce or enlarge the size of the image (from 25% to 400%). The preview pane immediately shows the results of your action.

Description of the print job settings that you can change on the control panel

172 Chapter 9 - Carry out print jobs VarioPrint 6000 line

[Align]

Setting Values Description

[Align]

[Top left]

An image on a sheet may be smaller than the media size of the output, for example because you scaled the image to 70% of its original size. The [Align] setting allows you to indicate the position of the image on the sheet. [Top left] moves the image to the upper left corner of the sheet.

[Top center]

[Top center] moves the image to the center at the top of the sheet.

[Top right]

[Top right] moves the image to the upper right corner of the sheet.

[Center left]

[Center left] moves the image to center of the left side of the sheet.

[Center]

[Center] moves the image to the center of the sheet.

[Center right]

[Center right] moves the image to the center of the right side of the sheet.

[Bottom left]

[Bottom left] moves the image to the lower left corner of the sheet.

[Bottom center]

[Bottom center] moves the image to the center of the bottom side of the sheet.

[Bottom right]

[Bottom right] moves the image to the lower right corner of the sheet.

Description of the print job settings that you can change on the control panel

Chapter 9 - Carry out print jobs 173 VarioPrint 6000 line

[Shift]

Setting Values Description

[Shift] [Margin shift] Use this setting to increase or decrease the margin. By default, the values of the front side and the back side are interlocked. This means that the values for the front side and the back side remain identical. Widening the margin can be useful if you want to staple or punch the output, for example. Narrowing the margin can be useful if you do not need additional space for stapling or punching the output, for example. By default, the front side and the back side are linked . Then the image on both sides will be shifted the same amount. Touch to terminate the link and shift each side individually.

[Image shift] Use this setting to shift the image horizontally or vertically. By default, the values of the front side and the back side are interlocked. This means that the values for the front side and the back side remain identical. By default, the front side and the back side are linked . Then the image on both sides will be shifted the same amount. Touch to terminate the link and shift each side individually.

Description of the print job settings that you can change on the control panel

174 Chapter 9 - Carry out print jobs VarioPrint 6000 line

[Print delivery]

Setting Values Description

[Print delivery] [Output tray] Select the output location for the job. Depend- ing on the settings for your job, the machine automatically suggests the preferred output lo- cation for your job. However, you can manual- ly overrule this suggestion.

[Sort]

[By page] The output is sorted by page.

[By set] The output is sorted by set.

[Offset stacking] This setting is only available when the [Offset stacking] setting is set to [As in job] in the workflow profile.

[Each set] Each set delivered to an output location will have a small shift on top of the previous set. This makes it easier to recognize individual sets.

[Off] All the sets or jobs that get to an output loca- tion are stacked in a straight stack.

[Advanced settings] It may only be necessary to change the ad- vanced settings when an offline finisher pro- cesses sheets in a non-standard way. Please refer to the finisher manuals for more informa- tion. 4

Description of the print job settings that you can change on the control panel

Chapter 9 - Carry out print jobs 175 VarioPrint 6000 line

Setting Values Description

[Print delivery] [Advanced settings]

[Sheet order]

[Face up] Deliver the prints face up, first sheet on top.

[Face up reverse] Deliver the prints face up, last sheet on top.

[Face down] Deliver the prints face down, first sheet on top.

[Face down reverse] Deliver the prints face down, last sheet on top.

[Sheet orientation]

[Header up LEF] Deliver the prints with the header on top side and in portrait position (vertical).

[Header up SEF] Deliver the prints with the header on top side and in landscape position (horizontal).

[Header down LEF] Deliver the prints with the header at the bot- tom side and in portrait position (vertical).

[Header down SEF] Deliver the prints with the header at the bot- tom side and in landscape position (horizon- tal). 4

Description of the print job settings that you can change on the control panel

176 Chapter 9 - Carry out print jobs VarioPrint 6000 line

Setting Values Description

[Print delivery] [Advanced settings]

[Print order] [Front/back] Default value. The front page on the front, the back page on the back.

[Back/front] Puts the front page on the back and the back page on the front.

[Rotation] [0 degrees] [180 degrees]

Rotates the prints 180 degrees.

[Margin erase]

Setting Values Description

[Margin erase]

Numbers Indicate if you want to erase the margins of the im- age. When you adjust the [Margin erase] you erase areas of the image, with a maximum of 100 mm / 3.94".

[Print quality]

Setting Values Description

[Print quality] [Brightness] (default 0)

When your prints are too dark or too light, changing the brightness can correct this prob- lem. -1 to -3 creates darker prints. +1 to +3 creates lighter prints.

[Contrast] (default 0) When the difference between light and dark areas of a print is not big enough, you can change the contrast to correct this problem. Example: When a blue text is displayed ras- tered, you can increase the contrast to make the text more black and sharper.

[Binding]

Setting Values Description

[Binding] Here you can define how to bind your document, for example where to put the staple. The available options depend on the finishers present. Check the preview for the result of the selection.

Description of the print job settings that you can change on the control panel

Chapter 9 - Carry out print jobs 177 VarioPrint 6000 line

[Number of sets]

Setting Values Description

[Number of sets] [Check first set] When the [Check first set] setting is enabled, the printer stops after the first set of a job has been printed. You can check the quality of the output.

NOTE This setting is only available when in the workflow profile [Check first set] is set to [As in job].

[Number of sets] You can indicate how many copies of the job you need. You can enter a value from 1 - 65,000. The default value is 1.

Job Name

Setting Values Description

[Job name] To identify your job more easily, you can change the name of the job. When you touch the [Job name] button a keyboard appears. Then you can change the name of the job.

[Print range]

Setting Values Description

[Print range] [All] When [All] is selected, all pages or records of the job will be printed.

[Page range] When [Page range] is selected, you can indi- cate the first page and the last page that must be printed in the [From] and [To] fields.

[Record range] When [Record range] is selected, you can indi- cate the first record and the last record that must be printed in the [From] and [To] fields.

Description of the print job settings that you can change on the control panel

178 Chapter 9 - Carry out print jobs VarioPrint 6000 line

[Special pages]

Setting Values Description

[Special pages] Banner pages, trailer pages, and separator sheets

[Overrule default banner / trailer page set tings]: indicate if you want to overrule the default banner page, trailer page, and sepa- rator sheets settings.

[Use a banner page]: indicate if the job must include a banner page. The banner page contains: the sender name, the recipient name, the accounting ID, the job name, the printer name, the operator in- struction, the cost centre and the number of sets.

[Use a trailer page]: indicate if the job must include a trailer page. The trailer page contains: the username, the recipient name, accounting ID, the job name, the printer name, the operator in- struction, the number of pages in a set, the number of sets, the number of staples, the number of folded sheets, the number of punched sheets, the number of creased sheets, the number of inserts, job received time, job start time, job completion time, the number of sheets per job media.

[Media of banner/trailer page]: define the media for the banner and trailer page.

[Use separator sheets ]: indicate the use of separator sheets to separate job sets. Sepa- rator sheets are not printed.

[Separator sheet after N sets]: define after how many sets you want a separator sheet.

[Media of separator sheets]: define the me- dia for the separator sheet.

Description of the print job settings that you can change on the control panel

Chapter 9 - Carry out print jobs 179 VarioPrint 6000 line

[Page numbering]

This setting is only available for PDF jobs.

Setting Values Description

[Page numbering]

[On] Print a page number on each page of the job.

[Off] No page number on each page of the job.

[Location] [Top left, alternating] [Top center] [Top right, alternating] [Bottom left, alternat- ing] [Bottom center] [Bottom right, alter- nating]

The position of the page number on the page.

[Start with page num- ber]

The number with which the page numbering starts.

[Text before page number] [Text after page num- ber]

The text that is printed before or after the page number.

Description of the print job settings that you can change on the control panel

180 Chapter 9 - Carry out print jobs VarioPrint 6000 line

Change the output settings

Change 2-sided into 1-sided and vice versa

Introduction

Jobs for which [1-sided] or [2-sided] printing was defined, will be printed on either one side or both sides of a sheet. If required, you can change this setting.

NOTE You cannot change this setting for the active print job .

Procedure

1. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [Queues] -> [Scheduled jobs] or [Waiting jobs], or select a DocBox.

2. Touch the job you want to change. 3. Touch [Edit], or double-tap the job to open the [Edit] window. 4. Touch the [1- or 2-sided] button. 5. Touch the desired value. 6. Touch [OK].

Change the output settings

Chapter 9 - Carry out print jobs 181 VarioPrint 6000 line

Change the binding edge

Introduction

The binding edge determines whether the binding position is along the long edge or the short edge of the media. The binding edge is usually set via the printer driver, for example. However, you can view and change the binding edge via the control panel. The binding edge has a relation with the direction of the margin shift, orientation and staple position.

When the binding edge is changed for two-sided printing, the image orientation is automatically adjusted to get the correct layout. The orientation of the image on the back side of the page will be changed too.

NOTE You cannot change this setting for the active print job .

Procedure

1. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [Queues] -> [Scheduled jobs] or [Waiting jobs], or select a DocBox.

2. Touch the job you want to change. 3. Touch [Edit], or double-tap the job to open the [Edit] window. 4. Touch the [Binding edge] button. 5. Touch the desired value. 6. Touch [OK].

Change the binding edge

182 Chapter 9 - Carry out print jobs VarioPrint 6000 line

Select another media for a job

Introduction

If you want to print a job on other media than originally defined for that job, you can select a different media via the operator panel. Requirements regarding the new media: The media must be available in the media catalog. The media must have the same size as the original media.

NOTE You cannot change this setting for the active print job .

Procedure

1. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [Queues] -> [Scheduled jobs] or [Waiting jobs], or select a DocBox.

2. Touch the job you want to change. 3. Touch [Edit], or double-tap the job to open the [Edit] window. 4. In the preview pane at the right-hand side, touch the media you want to change.

When more than one media was defined for a job, the preview pane displays a separate button for each media.

5. From the list, select the new media. 6. Touch [OK].

Select another media for a job

Chapter 9 - Carry out print jobs 183 VarioPrint 6000 line

Change the settings for covers

Introduction

When front covers or back covers are required, the settings are usually set in the printer driver, for example. However, you can view and change the settings for the covers via the control panel.

You can change the following settings for both the front cover and the back cover separately. Enable or disable the use of a cover. Select the desired media from the media catalog. Indicate whether the cover must be left empty, printed one-sided, or printed two-sided.

NOTE You cannot change this setting for the active print job .

Procedure

1. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [Queues] -> [Scheduled jobs] or [Waiting jobs], or select a DocBox.

2. Touch the job you want to change. 3. Touch [Edit], or double-tap the job to open the [Edit] window. 4. Touch the [Cover] button. 5. Make the required changes. 6. Touch [OK].

Change the settings for covers

184 Chapter 9 - Carry out print jobs VarioPrint 6000 line

Shift the image roughly to create binding space

Introduction

If you want to create space for staples or punch holes, for example, you can use the [Align] function. The preview in the right-hand pane of the control panel displays the consequences of your changes.

The [Align] function allows a rough image shift. You can select one of the following settings:

[Align] values

When you select: Then the image is moved to:

[Top left] The upper left corner of the sheet.

[Top center] The upper center of the sheet.

[Top right] The upper right corner of the sheet.

[Center left] The left-hand side of the sheet, over the center line.

[Center] The middle of the sheet.

[Center right] The right-hand side of the sheet, over the center line.

[Bottom left] The lower left corner of the sheet.

[Bottom center] The lower center of the sheet.

[Bottom right] The lower right corner of the sheet.

NOTE You cannot change this setting for the active print job .

Procedure

1. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [Queues] -> [Scheduled jobs] or [Waiting jobs], or select a DocBox.

2. Touch the job you want to change. 3. Touch [Edit], or double-tap the job to open the [Edit] window. 4. Touch the [Align] button. 5. Make the required changes. 6. Touch [OK].

Shift the image roughly to create binding space

Chapter 9 - Carry out print jobs 185 VarioPrint 6000 line

Shift the image precisely to create binding space or correct the layout

Introduction

If you want to create space for staples or punch holes, for example, you can use the [Align] function. However, when the [Align] function is not precise enough, you can use the [Margin shift] and [Image shift] functions. These functions allow you to shift the image more precisely. The preview in the right-hand pane of the control panel displays the consequences of your changes. If you shift the margin too much, you may loose part of the image.

The [Shift] function has two options. [Margin shift] allows you to increase or decrease the margin horizontally to create more

binding space, for example. With [Margin shift], you can shift an image relative to the binding edge.

[Image shift] allows you to move the image horizontally and vertically. This gives you more freedom in moving the image exactly to the desired position.

By default, the values of the front side and the back side are linked. To define different values for each side, touch . The changes you make are valid for the whole document, not only for the current page.

NOTE You cannot change this setting for the active print job .

Procedure

1. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [Queues] -> [Scheduled jobs] or [Waiting jobs], or select a DocBox.

2. Touch the job you want to change. 3. Touch [Edit], or double-tap the job to open the [Edit] window. 4. Touch the [Shift] button. 5. Make the required changes.

NOTE You can touch the - and + buttons to change the values. You can also enter the required value directly. Touch the number to enter a value manually. The numeric keyboard appears. There you can enter the required value.

6. Touch [OK].

Shift the image precisely to create binding space or correct the layout

186 Chapter 9 - Carry out print jobs VarioPrint 6000 line

Change the Print Delivery Settings

Introduction

Usually the print delivery settings have been defined in the printer driver. This section describes how to change some settings on the control panel.

Overview of the print delivery settings

Setting Description

[Output tray] Change the output location for the job. The list shows all the out- put locations that are available for your system. Make sure there is a match between the selected output location and the job requirements. For example, when a job requires sta- ples, you must select an output location that allows stapling.

[Sort] Change the sorting method of the prints. You can select sort [By page] or [By set].

[70] Sort by page

[71] Sort by set

[Offset stacking] Stack the prints with an offset. This setting is only available when the [Offset stacking] setting of the active [Workflow profile] is set to [As in job].

[Advanced settings] Finishing equipment often requires that the printed sheets are de- livered in a certain order. For finishers that are integrated in your printing system, the required settings are adapted automatically. However, sometimes it can be necessary to change a number of settings manually, for example when you want to finish the prints using offline finishers. If required, you can change the [Sheet or- der], [Sheet orientation], [Print order] and [Rotation].

Change the Print Delivery Settings

Chapter 9 - Carry out print jobs 187 VarioPrint 6000 line

[Advanced settings]

Setting Description

[Sheet order] [Face up] Deliver the prints face up, first sheet on top. [Face up reverse] Deliver the prints face up, last sheet on top. [Face down] Deliver the prints face down, first sheet on top. [Face down reverse] Deliver the prints face down, last sheet on top.

[Sheet orientation]

[Header up LEF] Deliver the prints with the header on top side and in portrait posi- tion (vertical).

[Header up SEF] Deliver the prints with the header on top side and in landscape po- sition (horizontal).

[Header down LEF] Deliver the prints with the header at the bottom side and in por- trait position (vertical).

[Header down SEF] Deliver the prints with the header at the bottom side and in land- scape position (horizontal).

[Print order] [Front/back] Default value. The front page on the front, the back page on the back.

[Back/front] Puts the front page on the back and the back page on the front.

[Rotation] [0 degrees] [180 degrees]

Rotates the prints 180 degrees.

NOTE You cannot change this setting for the active print job .

Procedure

1. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [Queues] -> [Scheduled jobs] or [Waiting jobs], or select a DocBox.

Change the Print Delivery Settings

188 Chapter 9 - Carry out print jobs VarioPrint 6000 line

2. Touch the job you want to change. 3. Touch [Edit], or double-tap the job to open the [Edit] window. 4. Touch the [Print delivery] button. 5. Make the required changes. 6. Touch [OK].

Change the Print Delivery Settings

Chapter 9 - Carry out print jobs 189 VarioPrint 6000 line

Change the stacking method per job

Introduction

The [Offset stacking] function creates a visible distinction between sets or jobs in an output location. The active workflow profile or the active automated workflow determines the default type of offset stacking.

You can only change the type of [Offset stacking] per job when the [Offset stacking] setting of the active [Workflow profile] is set to [As in job].

NOTE You cannot change this setting for the active print job .

Procedure

NOTE Remember that you can only change the stacking method per job when the active [Workflow profile] is set to [As in job].

1. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [Queues] -> [Scheduled jobs] or [Waiting jobs], or select a DocBox.

2. Touch the job you want to change. 3. Touch [Edit], or double-tap the job to open the [Edit] window. 4. Touch the [Print delivery] button. 5. Touch the [Offset stacking] button to toggle between [On] and [Off]. 6. Press [OK].

Change the stacking method per job

190 Chapter 9 - Carry out print jobs VarioPrint 6000 line

Change the print quality settings

Introduction

The print quality settings help you to optimize the quality of your prints. You can use the following applications to change the print quality settings. Printer drivers. Job submission applications such as PRISMAprepare. The control panel of your printer. The Settings Editor on the PRISMAsync controller.

In the printer driver, in PRISMAprepare and on the control panel, you can change the settings per job. In the Settings Editor, you can change the settings for all upcoming jobs.

The tables below describe both the basic and advanced print quality settings you can change through the control panel.

Basic Settings

Basic print quality settings

Basic settings Description

[Brightness] (default 0) When your prints are too dark or too light, changing the bright- ness can correct this problem. -1 to -3 creates darker prints. +1 to +3 creates lighter prints.

[Contrast] (default 0) When the difference between light and dark areas of a print is not big enough, you can change the contrast to correct this problem. Example: When a blue text is displayed rastered, you can increase the contrast to make the text more black and sharper.

NOTE Each of the 35 combinations of contrast and brightness settings corresponds to a specific transfer curve (i.e. transfer.ps file). In the Settings Editor, you can change the default settings for contrast and brightness adjustments for jobs that do not ask for any brightness or contrast adjustment.

Advanced Settings

Advanced print quality settings

Advanced settings Description

[Fattening] (default [Off]) The fattening function can increase the readability of texts with small fonts (< 6 points, 6/72 inch). However, when you print special data such as bar codes, fattening can make bar codes difficult to read. Therefore, you can turn the fattening function off when you print such special data.

[Minimum line width] (de- fault [On])

The minimum line width function is required to keep thin lines visible. The lines in PS/PDF jobs always keep a minimum width of 1/600 inch. However, when you print special data such as CAD drawings, smaller lines may be required. Therefore, you can turn the mini- mum line width function off. Then even thinner lines will be prin- ted. 4

Change the print quality settings

Chapter 9 - Carry out print jobs 191 VarioPrint 6000 line

Advanced settings Description

[RIP resolution] (default [600x2400] dpi)

The RIP resolution can improve the readability of fine details. When you print very thin, slanted lines, for example in Chinese characters, 1200x1200 gives the best result. 600x2400 is best suit- ed for mainly horizontal and vertical objects.

[RIP raster] (default [LINE_200LPI])

The default raster is [LINE_200LPI]. This is best suited for over most of the prints. In special cases, for example moir patterns from scanned images, you can try to improve the print result with the [DOT_200LPI] raster or even the [DOT_125LPI] raster. However, then you may loose some fine details. The raster screen for PS/PDF jobs is [LINE_200LPI]. All raster screens are compatible with resolutions of 600x2400 dpi and 1200x1200 dpi.

NOTE You cannot change this setting for the active print job .

Procedure

1. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [Queues] -> [Scheduled jobs] or [Waiting jobs], or select a DocBox.

2. Touch the job you want to change. 3. Touch [Edit], or double-tap the job to open the [Edit] window. 4. Touch [Print quality]. 5. Make the required changes. 6. Touch [OK].

Change the print quality settings

192 Chapter 9 - Carry out print jobs VarioPrint 6000 line

Define the finishing for print jobs

Introduction

The required finishing method is usually set in the printer driver. However, you can change the finishing method on the control panel.

Depending on the configuration of your system you can change the following finishing methods, for example. Number of staples. Number of punch holes. The location of the staples or punch holes. Folding method. Trimming method.

NOTE You cannot change this setting for the active print job .

Procedure

1. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [Queues] -> [Scheduled jobs] or [Waiting jobs], or select a DocBox.

2. Touch the job you want to change. 3. Touch [Edit], or double-tap the job to open the [Edit] window. 4. Touch the [Binding], [Folding], [Punching] or [Trimming] button. 5. Make the required settings, for example the number of staples or the number of punch holes. 6. Touch [OK].

Define the finishing for print jobs

Chapter 9 - Carry out print jobs 193 VarioPrint 6000 line

Change the job settings

Change the number of sets

Introduction

Follow the procedure below to change the number of sets for a job that is present in the list of [Waiting jobs] or [Scheduled jobs], or in a DocBox.

NOTE You cannot change this setting for the active print job .

Procedure

1. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [Queues] -> [Scheduled jobs] or [Waiting jobs], or select a DocBox.

2. Touch the job you want to change. 3. Touch [Edit], or double-tap the job to open the [Edit] window. 4. Touch the [Number of sets] button. 5. Enter the desired number of sets (between 1 and 65,000).

If necessary, touch the arrow button <- to correct the previous entry, or touch [Cancel] to close the numerical keyboard without saving the changes.

6. Touch [OK].

Change the job settings

194 Chapter 9 - Carry out print jobs VarioPrint 6000 line

Check the first set

Introduction

When you have a large print job and you want to check whether the job is printed correctly, it is advised to check the first set before printing all other sets. When a job is sent to the printer, the submitter can indicate in the job submission application that the first set must be checked. However, the workflow profile that is selected on the control panel determines how the printer handles these requests.

Depending on the selected workflow profile, the [Check first set] setting can have the following values: [On] [Off] [As in job]

When you use the [Check first set] function, the printed set is subtracted from the indicated total number of sets for a job. For example, when you need 10 sets, the printer will print the first set and then stop. When you continue the job, the nine remaining sets are printed. This is different from printing a proof.

Methods to check the first set

You can use one of the following methods to indicate that you want to check the first set. Use a workflow profile where [Check first set] is enabled. Then the printer stops after the first

set. Enable the function [Check first set] in the [Edit] window for a specific job only. However, you

can only change the [Check first set] setting there when a workflow profile is selected where the [Check first set] setting is [As in job].

NOTE You cannot change this setting for the active print job .

Procedure

1. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [Queues] -> [Scheduled jobs] or [Waiting jobs], or select a DocBox.

2. Touch the job you want to change. 3. Touch [Edit], or double-tap the job to open the [Edit] window. 4. Touch the [Number of sets] button. 5. Touch [Check first set] when the button states [Off].

The text changes from [Off] to [On]. A check mark indicates that the checking of the first set is enabled.

6. Touch [OK]. The [Number of sets] button has a check mark.

7. Touch [OK].

Check the first set

Chapter 9 - Carry out print jobs 195 VarioPrint 6000 line

Change the page range you want to print

Introduction

Usually, in the printer driver is defined whether all pages or only a range of pages must be printed. However, you can also change this setting through the control panel.

NOTE You cannot change this setting for the active print job .

Procedure

1. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [Queues] -> [Scheduled jobs] or [Waiting jobs], or select a DocBox.

2. Touch the job you want to change. 3. Touch [Edit], or double-tap the job to open the [Edit] window. 4. Touch the [Print range] button. 5. Select [Page range]. 6. Touch the [From] button.

Enter the number of the first page you want to print. 7. Touch the [To] button.

Enter the number of the last page you want to print. 8. Touch [OK].

Change the page range you want to print

196 Chapter 9 - Carry out print jobs VarioPrint 6000 line

Rename a job

Introduction

When you print a job, the job name is created in the application. The job name is displayed in the [Job name] field. To rename the job: 1. Touch [Jobs]. 2. Go to the location of the job. 3. Select the job you want to rename. 4. Touch [Edit], or double-tap the job. 5. In the job window, touch [Job name].

A keyboard appears. 6. Touch 'Backspace' until the current name is deleted. 7. Touch the characters to enter a new name. 8. Touch [OK].

Rename a job

Chapter 9 - Carry out print jobs 197 VarioPrint 6000 line

Change the use of separator sheets

Introduction

Separator sheets are empty sheets that are automatically inserted before each new set or job to separate two sets or jobs. In the Settings Editor you can define the media that must be used as separator sheets. You can also specify after how many sets you want to include a separator sheet in the stack. The use of separator sheets can be enabled via the automated workflows in the Settings Editor. However, you can change this setting through the control panel.

NOTE You cannot change this setting for the active print job .

Procedure

1. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [Queues] -> [Scheduled jobs] or [Waiting jobs], or select a DocBox.

2. Touch the job you want to change. 3. Touch [Edit], or double-tap the job to open the [Edit] window. 4. Touch the [Separator sheets] button to toggle between [On] and [Off]. 5. Touch [OK].

Change the use of separator sheets

198 Chapter 9 - Carry out print jobs VarioPrint 6000 line

Print your jobs using the control panel

Reprint a job

Introduction

NOTE The following description is only applicable when the setting [Printed jobs] in the Settings Editor is enabled.

Print jobs that have been completed are moved from the list of [Scheduled jobs] list to the list of [Printed jobs]. The [Printed jobs] list helps you to reprint jobs quicker and easier.

The list of printed jobs

When you want to reprint a job, the selected job is always copied to the list of [Waiting jobs] first.

You cannot change the job settings in the list of [Printed jobs]. This is only possible in the list of [Waiting jobs].

You cannot reprint streaming jobs. The list of [Printed jobs] does not store proof prints, system jobs and jobs that were stopped or

deleted. When you shut down the printer all jobs remain present in the list of [Printed jobs]. The list of [Printed jobs] can only store jobs. To prevent the disk of your system from becoming

full, jobs must be deleted manually or automatically on a regular basis. In the Settings Editor, you can indicate the cleaning period, then the clean-up is carried out at midnight or at the next start-up (in general the next morning).

If E-shredding is enabled, the jobs will be shredded after removal from the list of [Printed jobs].

Procedure

1. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [Printed jobs]. 2. Touch the job(s) you want to reprint or use the [Select] button to make a selection.

To undo the multiple selection and only select one job, you must touch and hold that job for two seconds.

3. Touch [Copy]. 4. Touch [Queues] -> [Waiting jobs]. 5. Touch the job you want to reprint. 6. Touch [Edit] if you want to change the settings, for example the number of sets. 7. Touch [Print].

Print your jobs using the control panel

Chapter 9 - Carry out print jobs 199 VarioPrint 6000 line

Select more than one job for printing

Introduction

The table below describes the possibilities to select more than one job for printing.

Select more jobs

Options Description

Select two or more jobs manually

Touch the jobs you want to print one by one.

[Select] button - [All] All jobs in the list of [Waiting jobs] are printed. The order in the list of [Waiting jobs] determines the print order. However, in the list of [Scheduled jobs] you can give priority to a job.

[Select] button - [Jobs with loaded media]

All jobs for which the required media are currently available in the paper trays, will be printed. This improves the productivity, be- cause you must not change the required media during printing. You may only need to add more of the currently available media types.

[Select] button - [Job label] A label is a name or tag that helps you to identify certain jobs on the control panel. When a job is sent to the printer, the person who submits the job can add a label to that job. The label can be any name that helps to identify certain jobs. The label can be de- fined in the printer driver, in a job ticket or via an automated work- flow. When the label in the printer driver is identical to a defined automated workflow, then the print job will be printed with the settings of this automated workflow. For example, the label Cus- tomer XYZ can be added to jobs. Then you can select and print all the jobs for 'Customer XYZ' at once.

[Select] button - [Invert se- lection]

Invert the current selection.

Procedure

1. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [Queues]. 2. If collapsed, first touch to expand the list of [Waiting jobs], or go to a DocBox. 3. Touch the jobs you want to print one by one, or make a selection using the [Select] button.

The selected jobs are highlighted. 4. Press [Print].

Select more than one job for printing

200 Chapter 9 - Carry out print jobs VarioPrint 6000 line

Print a job ticket

Introduction

Job tickets are used to transfer settings from an application to the printer. It can be convenient to print a job ticket before printing a job, to get an overview of the main job characteristics.

Job tickets can contain the following information, for example. Job name. Job owner. Job destination. Job settings such as the number of sets. Required media.

Where to find the [Print job ticket] button

The [Print job ticket] button is available at the following locations. List of [Printed jobs] (if this function is enabled in the Settings Editor). List of [Scheduled jobs]. List of [Waiting jobs].

Procedure

1. Press [Jobs]. 2. Go to one of the locations mentioned above. 3. Touch one or more jobs of which you want to print the job ticket. 4. Press [Print job ticket].

The job is sent to the bottom of the list of [Scheduled jobs]. The job may not be immediately visible in the list of [Scheduled jobs]. You can recognize the job by the prefix @_ in front of the job name.

Print a job ticket

Chapter 9 - Carry out print jobs 201 VarioPrint 6000 line

Make a proof When you make a proof, the print system prints one set or record of the job. A proof print does not affect the number of sets when you print the complete job.

The proof function is available in the following locations: List of waiting jobs A DocBox

When you select the [Proof] command, a copy of the job goes to the last position in the list of scheduled jobs. The original job remains in the list of waiting jobs or in the DocBox. You must first move a printed job to the list of waiting jobs before you make a proof.

The magnifying glass icon indicates a proof print.

[72] The [Proof] button

Procedure

1. Touch [Jobs]. 2. Go to the location of the job. 3. Select the jobs you want to proof, or use an option from the [Select] menu to select multiple jobs

together. 4. Touch [Proof].

Make a proof

202 Chapter 9 - Carry out print jobs VarioPrint 6000 line

Stop the printer

Introduction

The printer can stop in two ways. Manually

Use the Stop button or the [Stop after job] button to stop the printer. Automatically

Define a corresponding setting in the workflow profiles.

Stop the printer manually

Manual stop

When to stop Action Description

After a set Press the Stop button one time

The printer stops when the currently printed set of the active print job is completed.

The dashboard displays the [Resume] button with a vertical green bar, and the message [Stopping after set...].

When the set is completed, the vertical green bar changes into red and the message [On hold] appears.

Touch the [Resume] button to continue printing.

NOTE It depends on the set size and the moment you press the Stop button when the printer will stop. For example, when you have a large set of 1,000 pages and you press the Stop button

after the first page, the printing will continue for a couple of minutes.

As soon as possi- ble

Press the Stop button two times

The printer stops when the printer buffer is empty (as soon as possible).

The dashboard displays the [Resume] button with a vertical red bar, and the message [Stopping as soon as possible...].

When the printer buffer is empty, the message [On hold] appears.

Touch the [Resume] button to continue printing.

NOTE The buffer can contain up to 50 pages. Be- cause the printer stops when the buffer is empty, it is possible that the last printed set is not complete. 4

Stop the printer

Chapter 9 - Carry out print jobs 203 VarioPrint 6000 line

When to stop Action Description

After a job Touch the [Stop after job] button

In [Jobs] -> [Queues] -> [Scheduled jobs] you must se- lect the job after which the printer must stop. Then touch the [Stop after job] button.

A horizontal, red and white stop bar indicates that the stop-after-job function is active.

The printer stops when the last job before the stop bar is completed.

Touch the [Resume] button to continue printing.

NOTE The [Stop after job] button is not available when the [Confirm start of job: On] setting in the active [Workflow profile] is set to [On]. Then the printer stops automatically after each job.

NOTE When you print streaming jobs or jobs that consist of 1 large set, you must press the Stop button two times to stop the printer as soon as possible.

Procedure

Automatic stop

When Then

The [Check first set] setting in a [Workflow profile] is [On], and

The [Check first set] setting is also enabled in the job.

The printer stops each time the first set of a print job is completed. You can check the first set before you continue the print job.

The [Confirm start of job: On] setting in a [Workflow profile] is [On].

The printer stops each time at the start of a new job. You must start each job manually.

Stop the printer

204 Chapter 9 - Carry out print jobs VarioPrint 6000 line

Duplicate jobs When you want to use different print settings for the same source document, you can duplicate one or more waiting or DocBox jobs.

[73] Duplicate jobs

You can duplicate jobs at the following locations:

Function Scheduled jobs

Waiting jobs DocBox Printed jobs

[Duplicate]

Procedure

1. Touch [Jobs] 2. Go to the location of the job. 3. Select the job you want to duplicate. 4. If required, touch [Edit] to change the job name and other properties.

Duplicate jobs

Chapter 9 - Carry out print jobs 205 VarioPrint 6000 line

Delete print jobs You can remove print jobs before or after they are printed. Jobs that are not printed completely and proof prints do not come in the list of printed jobs.

[74] Delete function and confirmation window in list of waiting jobs

NOTE For the list of [Printed jobs], the system administrator can indicate in the Settings Editor that the list must be cleaned automatically at specified times. The factory default is one day. Furthermore, in the Settings Editor you can manually clean up the jobs in the lists of [Printed jobs], [Scheduled jobs], [Waiting jobs] and the [DocBox].

IMPORTANT When PRISMAsync does not automatically remove jobs from the list of printed jobs, make sure you remove the printed jobs manually to prevent a full system disc.

For security reasons, the system administrator can enable the E-shredding option. E-shredding overwrites the deleted job data and prevents the data recovery of a removed job.

You can delete jobs from the following locations:

Function Scheduled jobs

Waiting jobs DocBox Printed jobs

[Delete]

NOTE You can only delete the active print job in the list of [Scheduled jobs] when the printer is on hold. If necessary, press the Stop button two times to put the printer on hold.

Procedure

1. Touch [Jobs]. 2. Go to the location of the job. 3. Select the jobs you want to delete. 4. Touch [Delete]. 5. Confirm the deletion action.

Delete print jobs

206 Chapter 9 - Carry out print jobs VarioPrint 6000 line

Variable data printing

Variable data printing

Introduction

Printing variable data (VDP or variable document printing) is a print method that uses variable text and graphics, for example names and addresses. A VDP job has records to distinguish the different sets. VDP is used for direct marketing, advertising and personalized letters.

PRISMAsync supports several PPML formats and the PDF/VT format for variable data printing. PDF/VT enables variable document printing with the use of the latest PDF standards. Also manually created VDP jobs are supported.

Submit variable data jobs to PRISMAsync with an automated workflow, a hotfolder or PRISMAprepare. When PRISMAsync receives a variable data print job, it distinguishes the record structure. Records are treated as print sets with fixed content.

VDP job

The icon indicates a VDP job.

When the VDP job arrives in the print queue, you can use the following functions: Print a proof of the first record. Interrupt the print process after a certain record, and resume the print process of the job later. Print a range of records. Change the settings of the job. Be aware that when you change settings of a PDF/VT job, these

settings are applicable to all records of the job.

NOTE Page programming is not available for VDP jobs.

Variable data printing

Chapter 9 - Carry out print jobs 207 VarioPrint 6000 line

Convert a job to a variable data job If you print a large document that has the structure of a variable data document, you can instruct the print system to handle this job as a variable data job.

To indicate how the job is composed, you enter either the number of records or the pages per record. The job is split into records.

You can also convert jobs to variable data jobs with an automated workflow.

[75] Indicate the structure of the job

Procedure

1. Touch [Jobs]. 2. Go to the location of the job. 3. Select the job you want to convert. 4. Touch [Edit], or double tap the job. 5. Touch [Job type]. 6. Touch [Normal] -> [Variable data]. 7. Specify the number of records and the pages per record. 8. Touch [OK] to store the new job type. 9. Touch [OK] to start the conversion.

After you finish

After conversion you can make the job settings and print the variable data job.

Convert a job to a variable data job

208 Chapter 9 - Carry out print jobs VarioPrint 6000 line

NOTE You cannot change a VDP job into a normal job.

Convert a job to a variable data job

Chapter 9 - Carry out print jobs 209 VarioPrint 6000 line

The Transaction section (optional)

Introduction to the transaction section

Introduction

NOTE Transaction printing requires a license. The [System] view on the control panel displays the [Transaction] section only when transaction printing is licensed.

Transaction printing enables you to print typical transactional documents like invoices, salary slips or other variable data streams. Before you can start transaction jobs, you must first activate the transaction mode via the control panel. The [Transaction] section contains the settings that you need to use transaction printing. There you can also shift the image in case of a misalignment.

The following information is described below. An overview of the items in the [Transaction] section on the control panel. The sequence of steps you must perform to print your transaction jobs.

Overview of the [Transaction] section

[76] Overview of the [Transaction] section

The Transaction section (optional)

210 Chapter 9 - Carry out print jobs VarioPrint 6000 line

The items of the [Transaction] section

Description of the [Transaction] section

Num ber

Item Function

1 Dashboard The dashboard displays the following information for transaction printing. The connection status The IP address of the host that sends the jobs The name of the active transaction job The progress of the active transaction job

2 [Status transaction print- ing]

The [Status transaction printing] section gives access to the following functions. Turn the transaction printing mode on or off Select the setup for the transaction jobs

You can define setups in the Settings Editor ([Transac- tion printing] -> [Transaction setups]).

Put the printer online or offline. The printer must be online for the host to be able to connect to the printer.

3 [Active PDL] Display the active printer description language (read-on- ly). You can change the active PDL in the Settings Editor ([Transaction printing] -> [Settings] -> [Requested PDL]). When the requested active PDL is changed, the new PDL becomes effective when you put the printer online.

4 [Image shift] Display and change the active image shift settings, for example when the images on the front and back of a sheet are not aligned correctly.

Sequence of steps to print transaction jobs

The following table describes the sequence of steps for transaction printing. Make sure that the list of [Scheduled jobs] is empty before you begin.

Step Actions on the print er

Actions on the host Remarks

1 Switch the printer in- to the transaction printing mode.

Via the control panel: [System] -> [Transaction] -> [Transaction print- ing mode] -> [On].

2 Select the active set- up that you need.

Via the control panel: [System] - > [Transaction] -> [Active trans- action setup], or

Via the Settings Editor: [Trans- action printing] -> [Transaction setups], or

By the host via the data stream (when the printer is online and connected). 4

Introduction to the transaction section

Chapter 9 - Carry out print jobs 211 VarioPrint 6000 line

Step Actions on the print er

Actions on the host Remarks

3 Change the active PDL when currently the wrong PDL is ac- tive. This is only pos- sible when you have licenses for more than one PDL.

Via the Settings Editor: [Transac- tion printing] -> [Transaction set- ups] -> [Requested PDL].

4 Load the required media into the paper trays.

Only required when the active set- up has set the tray mode to tray to tray.

5 Put the printer on- line.

Via the control panel: [System] - > [Transaction] -> [Transaction printing online] -> [On], or

Via the Settings Editor: [Trans- action printing] -> [Settings] -> [Bring transaction printing on- line or offline].

6 Connect to the printer.

7 Submit the transaction print jobs.

8 Print the transaction print jobs.

You must perform all the regular activities, for example load the media, empty the output locations, add the supplies and solve errors.

9 Put the printer off line when the trans- action print jobs are ready.

Via the control panel: [System] - > [Transaction] -> [Transaction printing online] -> [Off], or

Via the Settings Editor: [Trans- action printing] -> [Settings] -> [Bring transaction printing on- line or offline].

10 Switch the printer back to the docu- ment printing mode.

Via the control panel: [System] - > [Transaction] -> [Transaction printing mode] -> [Off].

Introduction to the transaction section

212 Chapter 9 - Carry out print jobs VarioPrint 6000 line

Activate transaction printing

Before you begin

Make sure that the list of [Scheduled jobs] is empty.

Procedure

1. On the control panel, touch [System] -> [Transaction] -> [Transaction printing mode]. The text on the button changes from [Off] to [On].

2. If required, touch [Active transaction setup] and select the desired setup. The attributes of the transaction setup are defined in the Settings Editor on the PRISMAsync controller.

3. Load the required media into the paper trays if the setup selects the tray-to-tray mode. 4. Touch [Transaction printing online] to put the printer online.

The text on the button changes from [Off] to [On]. 5. On the host or mainframe, connect to the printer and start the job.

NOTE You can also select a setup and put the printer online via the [Transaction printing] section in the Settings Editor.

Activate transaction printing

Chapter 9 - Carry out print jobs 213 VarioPrint 6000 line

Deactivate transaction printing

Before you begin

Make sure that the list of [Scheduled jobs] is empty.

Procedure

1. On the control panel, touch [System] -> [Transaction] -> [Transaction printing online] to put the printer offline. The text on the button changes from [On] to [Off]. Note that you can only switch the [Transaction printing online] function to offline when The transaction print jobs are ready. The printer contains no more print data. The printer has stopped because all the jobs are ready, not because an error has occurred.

When you switch [Transaction printing online] to offline, the connection to the host is disconnected automatically.

2. Touch [Transaction printing mode]. The text on the button changes from [On] to [Off].

NOTE You can also put the printer offline via the [Transaction printing] section in the Settings Editor.

Deactivate transaction printing

214 Chapter 9 - Carry out print jobs VarioPrint 6000 line

Shift the image in the transaction printing mode

Introduction

When a misalignment occurs you can shift the image to correct the problem. You can shift the image on the front side and back side horizontally and vertically. Examples of possible misalignments: A name or address is not placed correctly in the right area. Lines on the front side and back side of a sheet are not aligned correctly.

To keep the shift settings for future use, you must specify the shift settings in the setup via the Settings Editor. Each time that the setup is loaded, the shift settings included in the setup will become the active shift settings.

NOTE Only use the image shift function if you want to shift the image of the whole job. The image shift applies to all the media in all the paper trays.

Procedure

1. On the control panel, touch [System] -> [Transaction]. 2. Touch the - or + buttons to shift the image on the front side or back side of the sheet.

Shift the image in the transaction printing mode

Chapter 9 - Carry out print jobs 215 VarioPrint 6000 line

Print in transaction printing mode When the transaction mode is active, you select a transaction setup that matches your print requirements.

When the alignment of the variable data is not correct, you adjust the image shift via the control panel or via a transaction printing setup with a preset defined image shift. The image shift is visible on all printed output from all paper trays.

This topic describes how to: Print in transaction mode Activate a transaction setup during transaction printing Switch off the transaction printing mode

[77] Transaction printing options and settings

Print in transaction mode

1. Touch [Jobs][Queues][Scheduled jobs] to empty the list of scheduled jobs, if required. 2. Touch [System][Transaction][Transaction printing mode][On]. 3. Touch [Active transaction setup] to select a transaction setup. 4. Load the media into the paper trays, if the tray-to-tray media assignment is active. 5. Touch the + or - buttons to shift the image, if required. 6. Touch [System][Transaction][Transaction printing online][On]. 7. Establish the connection from the host or mainframe to the print system and submit the jobs. 8. Monitor the jobs on the control panel, to make sure that all jobs are printed. Use the system

status colors to see when new media must be loaded.

Print in transaction printing mode

216 Chapter 9 - Carry out print jobs VarioPrint 6000 line

Activate a transaction setup during transaction printing

IMPORTANT For IPDS only. Make sure the current streaming job does not activate other transaction setups.

1. Press the [Stop] button once. 2. Wait until the printer is put on hold. 3. Touch [Active transaction setup] to select a transaction setup. 4. Touch the [Resume] button to resume the print process.

Switch off the transaction printing mode

1. Touch [System][Transaction][Transaction printing online][Off]. 2. Touch [System][Transaction][Transaction printing mode][Off].

Print in transaction printing mode

Chapter 9 - Carry out print jobs 217 VarioPrint 6000 line

Transaction setups

Create a new transaction setup

Introduction

For transaction printing, transaction setups are required. Transaction setups contain specific settings for specific transaction jobs. You can create setups in the Settings Editor.

NOTE This section describes how to create a transaction setup from scratch. If you want to create a transaction setup that is very similar to an existing setup, you can also create a copy and make changes afterwards. In this case you must select the setup and click [Copy].

Procedure

1. Go to [Transaction printing] -> [Transaction setups]. 2. Click the [Add] button.

A pop-up window appears. 3. Enter a name and description for the transaction setup, then click [OK]. 4. Check the box next to the setup, then click [Open] to allow changes to the settings of the setup. 5. Depending on the type of setup you created, click [IPDS transaction setup] or [PCL transaction

setup].

NOTE PCL is not available for all products. If you only have one license, the other PDL is not available.

You can change the settings: By group (click the pencil at the right-hand side of the group settings). By item (click the pencil behind the individual settings).

After you changed the settings of a transaction setup, you must load the transaction setup to make the setup changes active (see Activate a Transaction Setup on page 220).

Transaction setups

218 Chapter 9 - Carry out print jobs VarioPrint 6000 line

Edit a transaction setup

Procedure

1. Select [Transaction printing] -> [Transaction setups]. 2. Tick the checkbox of the setup you want to edit. 3. If required, click the [Edit] button to change the name or description of the setup, then click [OK]. 4. Click [Open] to allow changes to the setup. 5. Depending on the type of setup you want to change, click [IPDS transaction setup] or [PCL

transaction setup].

NOTE PCL is not available for all products. If you only have one license, the other PDL is not available.

You can change the settings: By group (click the pencil at the right-hand side of the group settings). By item (click the pencil behind the individual settings).

After you changed the settings of a transaction setup, you must load the transaction setup to make the setup changes active (see Activate a Transaction Setup on page 220).

Edit a transaction setup

Chapter 9 - Carry out print jobs 219 VarioPrint 6000 line

Activate a transaction setup

Introduction

After you create a new transaction setup or edited an existing transaction setup, you must activate the transaction setup in the Settings Editor. Otherwise, the changes are not applied.

Procedure

1. In the Settings Editor, click [Transaction printing] -> [Settings] -> [Bring transaction printing online or offline] to switch the printer offline.

2. Click [Transaction printing] -> [Transaction setups], select the setup and click [Load]. The transaction setup is now activated.

Activate a transaction setup

220 Chapter 9 - Carry out print jobs VarioPrint 6000 line

Import, export, or restore transaction setups You can import, export, and restore transaction setups.

Go to the transaction setups

Open the Settings Editor and go to: [Transaction printing][Transaction setups].

[78] [Transaction setups] menu

Import transaction setups

1. Click [Import]. 2. Browse to the XML file that contains the transaction setups. 3. Select [Replace] to replace the current transaction setups.

Select [Merge] to add the imported transaction setups to the current transaction setups. 4. Click [OK]. 5. Validate the imported transaction setups. (Validate a transaction setup on page 222)

Export transaction setups

1. Click [Export]. 2. Click [OK].

The current transaction setup definitions are saved in an XML file. 3. Open or save the XML file.

Restore the default transaction setup

IMPORTANT Be aware that this function removes all custom transaction setups.

1. Click [Restore]. 2. Click [OK].

Only the factory installed setup is present.

Import, export, or restore transaction setups

Chapter 9 - Carry out print jobs 221 VarioPrint 6000 line

Validate a transaction setup

What is transaction setup validation

When you use the [Validate] option, the printer checks for each tray if the media definition is valid. It depends on the tray selection mode ([Tray to media] or [Tray to tray]) if the media in the logical trays (tray to media table in setup) or the media in the physical tray (tray to tray) are checked.

Validate the transaction setup to check the media definitions of the selectable trays when you have defined, changed, or imported a transaction setup when media or the media family was changed only for the tray selection mode [Tray to tray]: when you have loaded or will load the

transaction setup, or when the physical tray configuration changes.

Validation in [Tray to media] mode

The printer checks if the media set per logical tray in the tray to media table of the setup are available in the media catalog.

Validation in [Tray to tray] mode

The printer checks if the media assigned to the physical trays in the tray view in the control panel are available in the media catalog.

Validate a transaction setup

1. Open the Settings Editor and go to: [Transaction printing][Transaction setups].

[79] [Transaction setups] menu

2. Click [Validate]. 3. The report appears. 4. Evaluate the report and take action if required. 5. Click [OK] to close the report.

Validate a transaction setup

222 Chapter 9 - Carry out print jobs VarioPrint 6000 line

Validate all transaction setups You can validate all available transaction setups. The report displays for every transaction setup the tray selection mechanism ([Tray to media] or [Tray to tray]) and the number of valid and invalid trays. For transaction setups with problems, use the [Validate] option to get more information.

1. Open the Settings Editor and go to: [Transaction printing][Transaction setups]. 2. Click [Validate all]. 3. The report appears.

[80] Example of validation report for all transaction setups

4. Check the number of invalid trays and take action if required. 5. Click [OK] to close the report.

Validate all transaction setups

Chapter 9 - Carry out print jobs 223 VarioPrint 6000 line

IPDS

Media information (IPDS)

Introduction

The media catalog: Contains a list of predefined media and their attributes. Is an essential part of the system behavior of the VarioPrint 6000 line. Helps you to print your jobs more easily while using the correct media.

Make sure that the [Tray selection mechanism] setting in the Settings Editor is set to [Tray to media].

This is the preferred setting. The printer is a media-based machine. The tray-to-media method supports this behavior.

For [IPDS tray to media for tray 1] assign the media catalogue item from the list. The list displays all the media in the media catalog. The system copies the media attributes from the selected media to the transaction setup.

When you assign A3/Tabloid-like media or want to use short-edge feed for other media, change the feed direction to [Short-edge feed (SEF)].

NOTE The Settings Editor displays only the media for which the media name is consistent with the IPDS media name definitions. Valid characters for an IPDS media name are: A-Z, a-z, 0-9, blank.

IPDS

224 Chapter 9 - Carry out print jobs VarioPrint 6000 line

Output recovery in case of an error (IPDS)

Introduction

The printer is equipped with an efficient, reliable output recovery in case of an error. By factory default, the output recovery is set to [Normal]. After the error is solved, the job continues at the page where the error occurred automatically.

However, some printing environments require that multiple copies must be avoided. For example, in transactions involving the printing of valuable documents such as cheques. In such an environment, the [Output recovery] setting of your IPDS setup must be set to [Suppressed].

When the output recovery is suppressed, the printer will not automatically make sure that the output is corrected after a recovery. All pending pages in the printer will be deleted and the stack will be ejected. The host system and the operator are responsible for the recovery. The operator must restart the job manually on the correct page.

The tables below describe what happens when either the normal output recovery or the suppressed output recovery is selected.

Normal output recovery in IPDS

Job Job progress states Normal output recov ery

End up in the output location after error re covery

Sheets printed suc- cessfully.

Are stacked at one of the output locations.

Sheets are in output location

Sheets copied to con- troller memory (in- cluding error pages).

Remain in controller memory.

Once the error is re- solved, the printer re- starts by printing the first page in the con- troller memory. 4

Output recovery in case of an error (IPDS)

Chapter 9 - Carry out print jobs 225 VarioPrint 6000 line

Job Job progress states Normal output recov ery

End up in the output location after error re covery

Sheets jammed in the machine.

The control panel dis- plays instructions on how to solve the pa- per jam. The operator has to remove these the jammed sheets manually.

These sheets stay in the memory of the controller. Once the printer resumes print- ing, these pages will be printed again.

Sheets in host memo- ry.

Remain in host mem- ory.

These sheets stay in the host memory. When the printer starts printing, these pages will be copied and sent to the con- troller.

Suppressed output recovery in IPDS

Pages that are copied to the memory of the controller are deleted from the system. The operator must send these missing pages as a new transaction print job to the printer.

Job Job progress states Suppressed output re covery

End up in the output location after error re covery

Sheets printed suc- cessfully

Are stacked at one of the output locations.

Sheets are in output location 4

Output recovery in case of an error (IPDS)

226 Chapter 9 - Carry out print jobs VarioPrint 6000 line

Job Job progress states Suppressed output re covery

End up in the output location after error re covery

Sheets copied to con- troller memory (in- cluding error pages).

Are deleted complete- ly.

These sheets are not delivered to the out- put location.

Sheets jammed in the machine.

The control panel dis- plays instructions on how to solve the pa- per jam. The operator has to remove these the jammed sheets manually.

These sheets are not delivered to the out- put location.

Sheets in host memo- ry.

Remain in host mem- ory.

Once the error is re- solved, the printer re- starts by printing the first page in the host memory.

Output recovery in case of an error (IPDS)

Chapter 9 - Carry out print jobs 227 VarioPrint 6000 line

PCL

Media messages (PCL)

Introduction

The media catalog: Contains a list of predefined media and their attributes. Is an essential part of the system behavior of the VarioPrint 6000 line. Helps you to print your jobs more easily while using the correct media.

Response to media messages

For transaction printing, the content of the paper trays (in terms of media from the media catalog) is translated into a format that the controller understands. However, the controller receives only a limited amount of information (name or size of the media). This can lead to miscommunication where the controller misses a media requirement. Then the controller will ask for the required media via a message on the control panel. This [Media message] indicates the name or size of the missing media.

Your response to the [Media message] depends on the mode in which the printer works, either: The tray-to-tray mode, or The tray-to-media mode.

PCL

228 Chapter 9 - Carry out print jobs VarioPrint 6000 line

Handle the media messages in the tray-to-media mode (PCL)

Procedure

1. A message on the control panel indicates that a media is missing. Select one of the following actions as a response to the message. Touch [Assign media].

Continue with step 2 when you select this option. Touch [Continue]. Touch [Cancel stream].

The print job is stopped. You can now solve the problem. You will most likely be able to solve the problem on the server.

NOTE The following steps apply only when you chose to assign a media.

2. From the list of media, select the media that must be used as the media the controller is asking for, and touch [OK]. If you do not select media from the media catalog with the requested size or name, the printer will select a media with the default size.

3. Select one of the 16 memory locations of the logical-tray table to be used for the required media. Note that the media that was previously allocated to that memory position in the setup will be overwritten. Then that media will no longer be available to the transaction stream. Now you can assign other media or continue the print job.

Handle the media messages in the tray-to-media mode (PCL)

Chapter 9 - Carry out print jobs 229 VarioPrint 6000 line

Handle the media messages in the tray-to-tray mode (PCL)

Procedure

1. A message on the control panel indicates that a media is missing. Select one of the following actions as a response to the message. Touch [Assign media].

Continue with step two when you select this option. Touch [Continue]. Touch [Cancel stream].

The print job is stopped. You can now solve the problem. You will most likely be able to solve the problem on the server.

NOTE The following steps two and three apply only when you chose to assign a media.

2. From the list of media, select the media that will be used as the media the controller is asking for and touch [OK]. The media will now be displayed with the name that is defined in the media catalog. If you do not select media from the media catalog with the requested size or name, the printer will select a media with the default size.

3. Select the paper tray where you want to load the required media and touch [OK]. 4. Load the media. 5. Close the paper tray. 6. Touch [OK].

Now you can assign other media or continue the print job.

Handle the media messages in the tray-to-tray mode (PCL)

230 Chapter 9 - Carry out print jobs VarioPrint 6000 line

Make an intermediate check print

Introduction

The machine has a function that enables you to make a check print while a job is printed. This function is called the intermediate check print. When you use this function, the machine prints a copy of the sheet that is printed at the moment you press the [Intermediate check print] button. You can use this sheet to check whether the quality and consistency of the prints still meet your requirements.

This section describes how to make an intermediate check print.

NOTE You can also press the [Intermediate check print] button when a job has not yet started. As soon as you start printing, a copy of the first sheet of the job will be printed.

NOTE In the Settings Editor, you can also set the [Interval of intermediate check print].

[81] Make an intermediate check print

Procedure

1. On the control panel, touch the [System] button. 2. Touch [Setup]. 3. Touch the [Intermediate check print] button in the [Advanced] section.

The intermediate check print is sent to the system output (see The output locations on page 21).

Make an intermediate check print

Chapter 9 - Carry out print jobs 231 VarioPrint 6000 line

Make an intermediate check print

232 Chapter 9 - Carry out print jobs VarioPrint 6000 line

Chapter 10 Keep the system printing

Use the Schedule

Introduction to the [Schedule] view

Introduction

The [Schedule] is your daily planning board for print jobs. The [Schedule] helps you to keep the machine running.

This section shows and describes the main parts of the [Schedule].

NOTE The descriptions of the colors of the bars and the indication of the required amount of sheets are only valid for document printing. For streaming jobs , all the bars remain grey until the paper trays are empty or the output locations are full. Then the machine stops and the bars become red. Furthermore, the media toolbar does not indicate the required amount of sheets.

The [Schedule] view

[82] The [Schedule] view

1. The Jobs Pane

The jobs pane shows the jobs on a timeline. The width of the job corresponds to the (remaining) print time. A vertical line separates the jobs. The vertical line moves to the left as the printing of a job progresses.

Use the Schedule

234 Chapter 10 - Keep the system printing VarioPrint 6000 line

An icon and the job name represent a job. The icon indicates the state of the job, for example printing .

Furthermore, the icon indicates the stop moments of the machine. For example, when the setting [Confirm start of job: On] in the workflow profiles (see list of references below) is set to [On] or when you use the [Stop after job] function.

2. The [Required media] pane

The [Required media] pane displays the media that are required for each scheduled job. For each required media, the media properties are displayed (see list of references below). The bars show the availability of the media. The bars can be the following colors.

The colors of the bars

Color of the bar Description

Green The required media is available.

Orange The media is required in the future, but not available then. For example because the paper trays do not contain sufficient sheets of the required media.

Yellow The system cannot determine the exact number of sheets that is availa- ble in the paper trays.

Red The media is required now, but not available. The job can only start when you load the required media.

When you print small jobs, the bars for these jobs may not be completely visible. To prevent that you do not see the status of these small jobs, the control panel can show the following images.

When you set the zoom control (5) to a shorter time-scale, in most cases the control panel will display bars for these small jobs.

The possible display of small jobs

Image Description

Green. The required media is available.

Orange. The media is required in the future, but not available then. For example because the paper trays do not contain sufficient sheets of the required media.

Red. The media is required now, but not available. The job can only start when you load the required media.

3. The Media Toolbar

The media toolbar displays the following information for the media that is selected in the [Required media] pane. Furthermore, the media type toolbar contains the [Load] button to load and assign the required media.

Introduction to the [Schedule] view

Chapter 10 - Keep the system printing 235 VarioPrint 6000 line

The icons in the media toolbar

Icon Description

The list of [Required media] shows the required media for the sched- uled jobs. When the paper module indicator is completely grey, this means that not one of the required media is available in the paper trays.

The list of [Required media] shows the required media for the sched- uled jobs. When a paper tray is highlighted in green, the highlighted paper tray contains a media that is required by one of the scheduled jobs.

The list of [Required media] shows the required media for the sched- uled jobs. When a paper tray is highlighted in blue, the highlighted pa- per tray contains the media that is also highlighted in blue in the list of [Required media].

4. The Output Locations Pane

The output locations pane displays the output locations that are required for the scheduled jobs. The bars show the availability of the output locations. The bars can have the following colors.

The colors of the bars

Color of the bar Description

Green The output location is required and available.

Orange The output location is required in the future, but not available then. For example, because the output location will be full soon.

Red The output location is required now, but not available. For example, be- cause the output location is full.

Gray The output location is required, but availability is unknown.

5. The zoom control

The zoom control enables you to adjust the time scale visible in the [Schedule]. When you touch the zoom button, a drop-down list appears. Then you can select the desired time scale (five minutes - eight hours).

Introduction to the [Schedule] view

236 Chapter 10 - Keep the system printing VarioPrint 6000 line

Load media via the [Schedule] view

Introduction

When the [Schedule] view is available on your printer, you can load and assign the required media directly in the [Schedule] section.

NOTE When you load a different media size, you must also set the paper guides inside the paper tray to the correct dimensions.

Illustration

[83] Load the media

Procedure

1. Touch the button for the media you want to load, for example Special A4. 2. Press [Load].

The [Trays] view appears. 3. On the screen, touch the paper tray where you want to load the media. 4. Touch [OK] to open the paper tray. 5. Load the media into the paper tray.

The system assumes you loaded the selected media type, in this example Special A4. The system will automatically assign Special A4 to that paper tray.

Load media via the [Schedule] view

Chapter 10 - Keep the system printing 237 VarioPrint 6000 line

NOTE You can always change the assigned media type later by touching the [Assign] button.

6. Gently close the paper tray.

Related information

Introduction to the Schedule view on page 234

Load media via the [Schedule] view

238 Chapter 10 - Keep the system printing VarioPrint 6000 line

The dashboard

Introduction

The dashboard is the upper blue part of the control panel. The dashboard is always visible, irrespective of the current view. The dashboard shows the following. The status of the system The current process Instructions for the operator The status of the supplies The status of the external finisher, if applicable Whether maintenance is required. The [Resume] button after you stopped the printer.

Illustration

The following illustration shows the dashboard while the machine is busy. The vertical status bar is green. No action is required.

[84] The dashboard - No action is required

The following illustration shows the dashboard while the machine is busy. The vertical status bar is orange. Next to the status bar, the dashboard displays a message that indicates which action is required soon.

[85] The dashboard - Action is required soon

The parts of the dashboard

The dashboard

Number Function

1 Display the status of the machine, for example [Initializing...], [Print- ing...] or [Printing will stop...]. Each status message can have a sub- message with additional information. 4

The dashboard

Chapter 10 - Keep the system printing 239 VarioPrint 6000 line

Number Function

2 Display the file name of the current job (for document printing) or cur- rent stream (for stream printing). Furthermore, the progress of the cur- rent job is displayed. For document printing, the counter can display the following informa- tion. Set X of Y Sheet X of Y or Sheet X.

X represents the current status of the print job. Y represents the total number of sets or sheets of a print job. When the sorting method for a job is set to [By set], and a set contains at least 40 pages, then the dashboard displays the set count (Set X of Y) and the sheet count (Sheet X of Y) for the set. When a set contains less than 40 pages, then the dashboard only displays the set count (Set X of Y). If the sorting method for a job is set to [By page], or when you print stream jobs, the dashboard only displays a sheet count.

3 Display the action that you must do now or soon. The colors of the ver- tical status bar at the left-hand side match the colors of the LED on the control panel and the operator attention light. When the color is orange or red, a message indicates the required action. Orange means that action is required soon. How long before an up- coming action the control panel starts to display the message depends on the defined warning time. Red means that action is required now.

NOTE The control panel can only display one message at a time. When there are more messages, the control panel displays the first required or most important message.

4 Display the status of the external finisher, if applicable. Display the status of the staple cartridges (Check the status of the

stapler cartridges on page 310). Display a warning that maintenance is required. When maintenance

is required soon, the maintenance icon becomes orange . When maintenance is required now, the maintenance icon becomes red .

Display the status of the toner reservoirs (Check the status of the to- ner reservoirs on page 308).

NOTE Only key operators who received the special maintenance training are allowed to do maintenance tasks.

NOTE The dashboard can only display one message at a time. When there are more messages, the dashboard displays the first required or most important message. The dashboard indicates that there are more messages. Touch this message to display all other messages.

The dashboard

240 Chapter 10 - Keep the system printing VarioPrint 6000 line

The operator attention light

Introduction

The operator attention light informs you about the status of the machine. To improve the productivity, the operator attention light can warn you some time before the machine stops. You can set the warning time on the control panel.

The colors of the lights match the status that is currently indicated on the control panel (The dashboard on page 239).

[86] The Operator Attention Light

Status colors

The colors of the operator attention light

Color Description

Red The machine has stopped, for example because a required media type is not available or an error has occurred. Operator attention is required now.

Orange The machine will stop soon, for example because an output loca- tion is almost full. The orange light lights up when the machine reaches the warning time. Operator attention is required soon.

Green The machine is busy printing. The machine can print longer than the defined warning time. Operator attention is not required.

All lights off The machine is idle. There are no jobs scheduled for printing.

The operator attention light

Chapter 10 - Keep the system printing 241 VarioPrint 6000 line

Status indicators This topic provides an overview of the status indicators for: Jobs Paper trays Media Software updates PRISMAsync Remote Match

Job status indicators

The job lists have icons to indicate the job status.

Icon Description

The printer receives the job via the network (spooling).

The printer must still convert the job into a raster image (raster image processing).

The printer converts the job into a raster image (raster image pro- cessing).

The printer prints a job.

The printer is ready to print the job.

The printer converts and prints the job simultaneously.

The printer has only printed a part of the number of sets.

The job contains a note for the print operator.

The job is a variable data printing job.

The job is a streaming job.

The job is a proof print.

The job is a bundled job.

The settings of the job can cause a conflict. Check the job settings to resume the print process.

4

Status indicators

242 Chapter 10 - Keep the system printing VarioPrint 6000 line

Icon Description

The job causes a raster image processing error.

Status indicators of paper trays

The control panel shows the following icons to indicate the status of the paper trays.

Icon Description

The paper tray holds media.

The paper tray is empty.

The paper tray is empty and a print job uses this paper tray.

The paper tray is open.

The paper tray contains too much media. Remove sheets from the stack to resume the print production.

The external paper input module is not ready due to an empty paper tray, paper jam, or another reason.

The paper tray contains media that the print system feeds in long-edge di- rection.

The paper tray contains media, for example A4R / LTRR, that the print sys- tem feeds in short-edge direction.

The paper tray is in use for the print production.

The paper guides are set incorrectly.

The paper tray contains tab sheets.

The paper tray of the inserter contains tab sheets as insert sheets.

4

Status indicators

Chapter 10 - Keep the system printing 243 VarioPrint 6000 line

Icon Description

The paper tray of the inserter contains insert sheets.

Media indicators

Media is displayed on several locations of the control panel. Extra information about the media is displayed by icons.

Icon Description

The media is required for a job in the list of scheduled jobs or list of waiting jobs.

The media family of the media needs a media family calibration.

The media is loaded into a paper tray.

The media is used in a scheduled job and loaded into a paper tray.

The warning icon indicates that the media definition needs attention. Check if all important attributes are defined.

Status indicators of software updates

When the configuration of downloading and installation of software updates is enabled in the Settings Editor, the dashboard of the control panel displays the status of the software updates.

Refer to the PRISMAsync Print Server administration guide how to configure software updates.

One or more software updates are available for download.

One or more software updates are ready for download at the specified time.

One or more software updates are being downloaded.

The download of one or more software updates has been paused.

The download of one or more software updates failed.

One or more software updates are ready for installation.

4

Status indicators

244 Chapter 10 - Keep the system printing VarioPrint 6000 line

One or more software updates are ready for installation at the specified time.

One or more software updates are being installed.

The installation of one or more software updates failed.

Status indicators of PRISMAsync Remote Match

Refer to the help of PRISMAsync Remote Match for more information.

Icon Description

The synchronization of this printer has been started.

The last synchronization of this printer has been performed successfully.

The last synchronization of this printer caused one or more problems.

This printer has not been synchronized yet.

Status indicators

Chapter 10 - Keep the system printing 245 VarioPrint 6000 line

Status indicators

246 Chapter 10 - Keep the system printing VarioPrint 6000 line

Chapter 11 Media handling

Introduction

Introduction to the media handling

Introduction

The machine supports a wide range of media, including tabs and inserts. The supported media sizes range from 203 mm x 203 mm (minimum) to 320 mm x 488 mm (maximum). When the Flex- XL paper input module is installed the media sizes range to 350 mm x 500 mm. The supported media weights range from 50 - 300 g/m for media that are recommended by the manufacturer, and 60 - 200 g/m for other media. When the optional light-weight media module is installed also recommended media with a media weight of 44 g/m is supported.

This section describes the following. Media handling in general The [Media catalog] Temporary media.

NOTE You can place all the supported media in any paper tray.

General introduction to the media handling

All the print jobs require media that you can assign to the paper trays via the control panel. The print jobs can require media that are included in the [Media catalog]. However, the print jobs can also require media that are not included in the [Media catalog]. These media become temporary media on the system.

What is the [Media catalog]

The print system uses a central media catalog from which you can select media for jobs. The [Media catalog] is a list of predefined media and media attributes which you can define in the Settings Editor application on the controller. When enabled in the Settings Editor you can also define the [Media catalog] on the control panel. The use of the [Media catalog] is only recommended, not compulsory.

When you use the [Media catalog], the control panel, the printer drivers and other applications all display the same list of predefined media. The control panel and the printer driver automatically retrieve and show the latest version of the [Media catalog].

What are temporary media

You can also use many other media that are not included in the [Media catalog]. These media become temporary media. You can look up the currently used temporary media in the [Media] section of the [System] view. Furthermore, you can assign the temporary media to a paper tray.

The temporary media remain available on the system until: No more waiting jobs need this media type No more scheduled jobs need this media type No more printed jobs need this media type No more DocBox jobs need this media type This media type is no longer available in the paper trays.

When you plan to use these media more often, you can add these temporary media to the [Media catalog] Add temporary media to the Media catalog on page 258.

Introduction

248 Chapter 11 - Media handling VarioPrint 6000 line

Introduction to the Trays view

Introduction

The [Trays] view has the following functions. Display the current content and filling level of the paper trays. Open the paper trays and assign the required media for the print jobs. Change the media that is currently assigned to a paper tray. Assign media to a paper tray when you already loaded the media and pressed the button for

[Not assigned] on the control panel of the paper module (The paper modules on page 19). Unassign media from a paper tray. Perform a media registration.

This section describes the items of the [Trays] view.

NOTE The machine can have 1, 2 or 3 paper modules, possibly combined with a roll feeder. When the machine has more than 1 paper module, the [Trays] view displays all the available paper modules.

[87] Example of a configuration with 1 paper module

Introduction to the Trays view

Chapter 11 - Media handling 249 VarioPrint 6000 line

The items of the [Trays] view

Description of the [Trays] view

Item Function

Content of the paper trays Indicate the current content and filling level of the paper trays. The [Trays] view displays the parameters of the media that are currently in the paper trays. The parameters are a combination of icons and texts (The paper tray information on page 250).

[Assign] button Assign media from the media catalog (Assign the media to a paper tray on page 256).

[Unassign] Unassign media from the selected paper tray.

[Open] button Open the selected paper tray to load the media (Load the media on page 255).

[Registration] Perform a media registration for the selected media (Perform a media registration for standard-size media - Print the test sheets and create the ruler on page 266, Perform a media reg- istration for large media - Print the test sheets and create the ruler on page 273)

Arrow buttons When your configuration contains more paper modules than the [Trays] view can display in 1 screen, you can touch the ar- row buttons to change part of machine displayed.

The paper tray information

The [Trays] view displays the following textual information for each paper tray. The media name, for example 'Normal paper' The media size, for example A3 or A4 The media weight, for example 80 g The media color The special characteristics of the media, for example [cyclic] or [punched]. In brackets,

additional information is given about these media, for example the cycle count or the number of holes for punched media.

The [Trays] view displays the following icons for each paper tray.

The meaning of the icons

Icon Description

The paper tray is empty

The paper tray is full

NOTE Each line indicates the presence of about 100 sheets

The paper tray is too full. Please remove sheets from the stack

The plate inside the paper tray is down

4

Introduction to the Trays view

250 Chapter 11 - Media handling VarioPrint 6000 line

Icon Description

The paper tray is open

The paper guides inside the paper tray do not match the selected me- dia size. You must correct the paper guides or the selected media

or

The paper tray contains media that are fed over the long edge (LEF) or short edge (SEF) . The small icons indicate A4 or A4-like media. The large icons indicate A3 or A3-like media. When you defined a color for a media, the icon can have that color

The paper tray is in use for one or more scheduled jobs

The paper tray contains tab sheets

The paper tray contains tab sheets that must be processed as inserts

The paper tray contains inserts

The paper tray contains media that are fed over the long edge (LEF)

The paper tray contains media that are fed over the short edge (SEF)

Introduction to the Trays view

Chapter 11 - Media handling 251 VarioPrint 6000 line

Introduction to the [Media] section

Introduction

The [System] view gives access to system settings, system information, media information and maintenance tasks.

This section gives an overview of the [Media] section in the [System] view.

Overview of the [Media] section

The print system uses a central media catalog from which you can select media for jobs. Correctly defined media attributes are important in order to ensure high print quality.

When enabled in the Settings Editor, you can add, delete and change media in the media catalog via the control panel.

The items of the [Media] section; [Media management via control panel] disabled

When [Media management via control panel] is disabled you can only view the media catalog.

[88] Overview of the [Media] section; [Media management via control panel] disabled

Introduction to the [Media] section

252 Chapter 11 - Media handling VarioPrint 6000 line

Num ber

Item Function More information

1 List of all the media that are available in the [Media catalog].

Display the current content of the [Media catalog].

2 List of temporary media Display the temporary me- dia that are currently avail- able on the system .

What are temporary media on page 248

3 Add temporary media to the media catalogue .

Add temporary media to the Media catalog on page 258

4 [Registration] button Print test sheets and per- form the registration for in- dividual media. You can do a media registration for standard-size media and large media .

Perform a media registra- tion for standard-size me- dia on page 266 Perform a media registra- tion for large media on page 273

The items of the [Media] section; [Media management via control panel] enabled

When [Media management via control panel] is enabled you can add, delete and change media in the media catalogue via the control panel.

[89] Overview of the [Media] section; [Media management via control panel] enabled

Introduction to the [Media] section

Chapter 11 - Media handling 253 VarioPrint 6000 line

Num ber

Item Function More information

1 List of all the media that are available in the [Me- dia catalog].

List of temporary media List of all media

Display the current con- tent of the [Media cata- log].

Display the temporary media that are currently available on the system .

Display the [Media cata- log] and the temporary media.

What are temporary media on page 248

2 Media management Manage the media catalog: Add (new, copy) Edit Delete Optimize [To catalog] (only for

temporary media)

Add Add media to the media catalog on page 257

Optimize Perform a media regis- tration for standard-size media - Print the test sheets and create the ruler on page 266 Perform a media regis- tration for large media - Print the test sheets and create the ruler on page 273

[To catalog] Add temporary media to the Media catalog on page 258

3 Search button for the me- dia.

Search through the list of media.

4 Select which media you want to display.

[Media catalog], temporary media or all media.

5 Filter the media. Filter the list of media on: Media size Media weight

Clear the filters

Introduction to the [Media] section

254 Chapter 11 - Media handling VarioPrint 6000 line

Media related actions

Load the media

Introduction

This section describes how to load the media into a paper tray.

When you load the media via the [Load] button in the [Schedule], the paper tray is automatically assigned to the correct media.

When you load and assign the media via the [Assign] button in the [Trays] view, you must assign the paper tray to the loaded media manually.

When no external finisher is connected to the machine, you must put all the media types face up and header up into the paper trays. The tabs of tab sheets must be at the right-hand side. When an external finisher is connected to the machine, it is possible that you must put the media into the paper trays in a different way. Refer to the documentation of the external finisher for more information about how to place the media.

When to do

The [Schedule] displays a red bar next to a required media. The red bar indicates that a scheduled job now requires a media that is not available in the paper trays.

The [Schedule] displays an orange bar next to a required media. The orange bar indicates that a scheduled job requires media which is either not available in the paper trays or which is available, but not in sufficient quantity to finish the job.

The current job requires more of the same media than is currently loaded in the paper trays. You can add more of the required media into another paper tray.

You already want to load and assign media that are required for the next job (work ahead).

IMPORTANT Always put the stack of media at the left-hand side of the paper guides inside the paper trays, as indicated on the sticker inside the paper trays.

Procedure

1. Put a small stack of the media into the paper tray. 2. Pinch the green handle of the right-hand guide and push the guide against the edge of the media. 3. Turn the green knob to adjust the front guide and the rear guide. 4. Put the rest of the media on top of the small stack.

NOTE When you want to assign the media later you must press the [Not assigned] button.

Media related actions

Chapter 11 - Media handling 255 VarioPrint 6000 line

Assign the media to a paper tray - Load and assign the media to a paper tray

Introduction

The [Trays] view has several functions (see Introduction to the Trays view on page 249).

This section describes how to open the paper trays and assign the media in the [Trays] view.

NOTE The preferred way to load the required media is via the [Schedule]. There you can select a media and use the [Load] button, or press the required media button 2 times.

Procedure

1. On the control panel, select the [Trays] view. 2. Touch the paper tray where you want to put the media, for example tray 2. 3. Touch [Open]. 4. Load the media (see Load the media on page 255). 5. Close the paper tray.

NOTE There is a risk that a job is printed on a wrong media.

6. Touch [Assign]. A window with media names appears. The previous media in the selected paper tray is highlighted.

NOTE The list displays all the media in the media catalog that match the position of the paper guides inside the closed paper tray. When the list is empty, the media catalog does not contain media that match the position of the paper guides.

7. Touch the name of the loaded media, for example Premium Label. 8. Touch [OK].

Assign the media to a paper tray - Change the currently assigned media type

Procedure

1. On the control panel, select the [Trays] view. 2. Select the paper tray for which you want to change the assigned media type. 3. Touch [Assign].

A window with media names appears.

NOTE The list displays all the media in the media catalog that match the current position of the paper guides inside the paper tray. When the list is empty, the media catalog does not contain media that match the position of the paper guides.

NOTE There is a risk that a job is printed on a wrong media.

4. Touch the name of the new media type. 5. Touch [OK].

Assign the media to a paper tray - Load and assign the media to a paper tray

256 Chapter 11 - Media handling VarioPrint 6000 line

Add media to the media catalog When enabled in the Settings Editor, you can add new media to the media catalog via the control panel.

[90] Media management via the control panel

Procedure

1. Touch [System] -> [Media]. 2. Use one of the following methods to add new media.

Touch [Copy] to use one of the current media definitions as starting point and copy its attributes to the new media definitions.

Touch [New] to define all attributes from scratch. 3. If required, define the name and attributes of the new media.

For convenient retrieval of media in the media catalog, use the following media attributes: Name Custom type name

IMPORTANT For optimal print quality, define the correct values for the following media attributes. Refer to the packaging of the media for this information. Size Weight Surface type

4. Touch [OK].

Add media to the media catalog

Chapter 11 - Media handling 257 VarioPrint 6000 line

Add temporary media to the [Media catalog]

Introduction

When a job is submitted that requires media that are not included in the [Media catalog], these media become temporary media. The control panel displays the temporary media in the following places. In the list of [Required media] in the [Schedule] view, when the job is scheduled for printing. In the list of [Temporary media] in the [Media] tab of the [System] view.

When you plan to use a temporary media more often, you can add the media to the [Media catalog].

Procedure

1. Touch [System] -> [Media]. 2. Select one or more temporary media. 3. Touch the drop-down icon ( ). 4. Select [To catalog] from the drop-down menu. 5. Fill out the media attributes. 6. Press [OK].

Add temporary media to the [Media catalog]

258 Chapter 11 - Media handling VarioPrint 6000 line

Media indicators Black & White Media is displayed on several locations of the control panel. Extra information about the media is displayed by icons.

Icon Description

The media is required for a job in the list of scheduled jobs or list of waiting jobs.

The media is loaded into a paper tray.

The media is used in a scheduled job and loaded into a paper tray.

The warning icon indicates that the media definition needs attention. Check if all important attributes are defined.

Media indicators Black & White

Chapter 11 - Media handling 259 VarioPrint 6000 line

Change the advanced media settings

Introduction

The advanced media settings enables you to print on certain special media.

When all the advanced media settings have their default value, the button for [Advanced media settings] displays the word [Default]. After you changed one or more settings, this button displays the word [Custom].

[Default] means that the [Low temperature mode] is [Off], [Double-sheet detection] is [On], the [Enhanced media mode] is [Off] and the [Paper quality] is set to [Normal].

This section describes when it is recommended to change the advanced media settings. Furthermore, this section describes how to change the settings.

When to do

[Low temperature mode] Pre-printed: The system is able to handle pre-printed media without problems if the guidelines

regarding pre-printed media and inks are taken into account. Contact your local Canon representative to get a copy of these guidelines. In case media or inks are used that are not listed in the guidelines, the use of pre-printed media can lead to undesired print quality issues. To postpone print quality issues arising, a [Low temperature mode] is available on the printer. It is advised to enable the [Low temperature mode] when there are problems with processing pre-printed media. The interval between undesired print quality issues will then be increased significantly (for some temperature sensitive inks, but no guarantee for all inks). It is advised to enable the [Low temperature mode] when you process pre-printed media. It takes several minutes until [Low temperature mode] is reached. The [Low temperature mode] should not be enabled when you use media heavier than 120 g/m2. This could lead to print problems.

A secondary benefit (to pre-printed support) is to save energy. The preheater operates on a lower temperature.

[Double-sheet detection]

Double-sheet detection warns you if two or more sheets have been separated from the media stack in a paper tray at the same time. However, it is not always convenient to have the double- sheet detection enabled, for example when you use transparent media with a cover sheet. Then you can set the [Double-sheet detection] to [Off]. By factory default, [Double-sheet detection] is [On].

[Enhanced media mode]

Glossy media can cause a collating or stapling error in the finisher. You can set the [Enhanced media mode] to [On] to prevent the error. This will decrease the productivity of the printer. By factory default, the [Enhanced media mode] is [Off]. When you set the [Enhanced media mode] to [On] and the printer status is [Printing...], the dashboard displays a message that the enhanced media mode is enabled.

The [Enhanced media mode] is only available on printers that are equipped with an optional finisher (see The output locations on page 21).

[Paper quality]

Good media is best run with the highest paper quality setting: [Normal].

Lower grade media with respect to paper dust, such as some book papers for example, can leave more paper dust in the printer. This can lead to ghost images on prints directly after the black image cleaning procedure or to ghost images of previous pages on prints. When you use lower

Change the advanced media settings

260 Chapter 11 - Media handling VarioPrint 6000 line

grade media, you can improve the print quality, with respect to these undesired ghost images, by changing the value of the [Paper quality] setting to [Low] or even [Lower]. However, this affects the productivity by almost 5 and 10% respectively.

Please refer to the Troubleshooting chapter for more information (see Troubleshooting on page 320).

[Paper quality test]

This test helps you to check if the correct [Paper quality] setting is set. In the Settings Editor, you can select the media for this test. It is advised to choose the same media as used for the job. Or, in other cases, choose media which covers the width of the media used as a minimum. When you start the [Paper quality test], the printer sends 5 empty sheets of the selected media to the system output. This is done after each of the next 5 black image cleaning procedures. Keep in mind that this can last 2500, 1250 and 1000 sheets when the [Paper quality] setting is set to [Normal], [Low] and [Lower] respectively. Then the test stops and the print job continues without interruption.

Check the last set (fifth) of the empty sheets to see if the [Paper quality] setting is cleaning the print process properly. The sheets should show no pollution.

NOTE When the system goes into standby mode before the [Paper quality test] has finished, the [Paper quality test] starts again.

Before you begin

1. On the control panel, touch the [System] button. 2. Touch [Setup]. 3. Touch the [Advanced media settings] button in the [Advanced] section. 4. Enter the maintenance PIN when you change a setting.

NOTE The control panel will only ask you to enter the maintenance PIN when a maintenance PIN is defined in the Settings Editor.

Change the advanced media settings - Enable the [Low temperature mode]

Procedure

1. Touch the [Low temperature mode] button. The text on the button changes from [Off] to [On].

NOTE Each time you touch the button, the setting changes from [On] to [Off] and the other way round.

2. Press [OK]. When the [Low temperature mode] is [On], this is visible on the dashboard.

Change the advanced media settings - Enable the [Low temperature mode]

Chapter 11 - Media handling 261 VarioPrint 6000 line

Change the advanced media settings - Disable the double-sheet detection

Procedure

1. Touch the [Double-sheet detection] button. The text on the button changes from [On] to [Off].

NOTE Each time you touch the button, the setting changes from [On] to [Off] and the other way round.

2. Press [OK].

Change the advanced media settings - Disable the double-sheet detection

262 Chapter 11 - Media handling VarioPrint 6000 line

Change the advanced media settings - Enable the enhanced media mode

IMPORTANT This setting is only available on machines that are equipped with an optional finisher.

Procedure

1. Touch the [Enhanced media mode] button. The text on the button changes from [Off] to [On].

NOTE Each time you touch the button, the setting changes from [Off] to [On] and the other way round.

2. Press [OK].

Change the advanced media settings - Enable the enhanced media mode

Chapter 11 - Media handling 263 VarioPrint 6000 line

Change the advanced media settings - Change the [Paper quality]

Procedure

1. Touch the [Paper quality] button. A drop-down list appears.

2. Touch the desired value. 3. Press [OK].

Change the advanced media settings - Change the [Paper quality]

264 Chapter 11 - Media handling VarioPrint 6000 line

Change the advanced media settings - Start the [Paper quality test]

Procedure

1. Touch the [Paper quality test] button to start the test.

NOTE When the test is started, the progress of the test is displayed on the button and the text on the button changes from [Start] to [Stop].

NOTE The test stops automatically after the fifth set. You do not have to stop the [Paper quality test] yourself.

NOTE When you touch the button again, the test is stopped. The text on the button changes from [Stop] to [Start].

Change the advanced media settings - Start the [Paper quality test]

Chapter 11 - Media handling 265 VarioPrint 6000 line

Perform a media registration for standard-size media - Print the test sheets and create the ruler

Introduction

The different properties of media can influence the alignment of images when the media are printed. To ensure a correct alignment, you can perform a media registration for each individual media in the [Media catalog]. The following values will be measured. The Z-position of side 1 The X-length of side 1 The Z-position of side 2 The X-position of side 1 The X-position of side 2.

For each media registration, a paper ruler and 3 test sheets will be printed. Depending on the regional setting in the Settings Editor, the paper ruler is printed on A4 or Letter. You can use the first printed sheet to create the paper ruler. However, you can also use a universal ruler of your own. The ruler must be long enough to carry out the measurements. You must carry out each measurement on all 3 test sheets. The system calculates the average value of the measurements.

This section describes how to perform a media registration for standard-size media (media with a length of less than 390 mm / 15.35").

NOTE It is recommended to perform the media registration when the list of [Scheduled jobs] is empty.

Before you begin

1. On the control panel, press the [System] button. 2. Press [Media]. 3. Select a media from the [Media catalog] for which you want to perform a media registration. 4. Press [Optimize].

When a maintenance PIN is defined in the Settings Editor, a numerical keyboard appears. 5. Enter the maintenance PIN to start the wizard.

NOTE The following procedures often refer to the start of the ruler. The start of the ruler is the line where the shaft of the arrow starts.

Procedure

1. Read the introduction on the screen. Then press [Next]. The printed test sheets go to the system output.

2. Take the first printed sheet.

Perform a media registration for standard-size media - Print the test sheets and create the ruler

266 Chapter 11 - Media handling VarioPrint 6000 line

3. Fold the sheet along the line 'B-H' on side 1.

T es

t b it

m ap

: R

E G

IS T

R A

T IO

N

S iz

e: 2

1 0 x

2 9 7 m

m

2 0 0 6 -1

0 -0

9 /

1 4 :0

8 :3

6

P ag

e 1 1

P ri

m ar

y i

m ag

e

A G

05-

0

05+

3weksteehS-

B H

D

C

I

F

[91] Fold the sheet to create a ruler

This is your ruler.

T es

t b it

m ap

: R

E G

IS T

R A

T IO

N

S iz

e: 2

1 0 x

2 9 7 m

m

2 0 0 6 -1

0 -0

9

/ 1

4 :0

8 :3

6

P ag

e 1 1

P ri

m ar

y i

m ag

e

A G

05-

0

05+

3weksteehS-

B H

D

T es

t b it

m ap

: R

E G

IS T

R A

T IO

N

S iz

e: 2

1 0 x

2 9 7 m

m

2 0 0 6 -1

0 -0

9

/ 1

4 :0

8 :3

6

P ag

e 1 1

P ri

m ar

y i

m ag

e

A G

B H

D

100 0

105 0

1100 1150 120 0

125 0

130 0

135 0

140 0

145 0

150 0

155 0

160 0

165 0

170 0

175 0

180 0

185 0

190 0

195 0

200 0

205 0

210 0

215 0

220 0

225 0

230 0

235 0

240 0

245 0

250 0

255 0

260 0

265 0

270 0

275 0

280 0

-50

0

+50

Prim ary X ima ge p ositi on

Prim ary Z ima ge p ositi on

Prim ary d iamo nd s hap e

X le ngth

L

[92] The ruler

Perform a media registration for standard-size media - Adjust the Z-position of side 1

Procedure

1. Take the first test sheet. 2. Align the start of the ruler with point 'B' of the test sheet.

T est b

itm ap

: R E

G IS

T R

A T

IO N

S ize: 2

1 0

x 2

9 7

m m

2 0

0 6

-1 0

-0 9

/ 1 4

:0 8

:3 6

P ag

e 1

1 P

rim ary

im ag

e

A C

G I

05-

0

05+

3 weksteehS-

BH

D F

100 0

105 0

1100 1150 120 0

125 0

130 0

135 0

140 0

145 0

150 0

155 0

160 0

165 0

170 0

175 0

180 0

185 0

190 0

195 0

200 0

205 0

210 0

215 0

220 0

225 0

230 0

235 0

240 0

245 0

250 0

255 0

260 0

265 0

-50

0

+50

Prim ary X ima ge p ositi on

Prim ary Z ima ge p ositi on

Prim ary d iamo nd s hap e

X le ngth

L

B

-50

0

+50

[93] Align the ruler with 'B'

3. Read the value at the edge of the test sheet.

Perform a media registration for standard-size media - Adjust the Z-position of side 1

Chapter 11 - Media handling 267 VarioPrint 6000 line

4. Enter the value. 5. Take the second test sheet. 6. Repeat the steps 2 - 4. 7. Take the third test sheet. 8. Repeat the steps 2 - 4.

Perform a media registration for standard-size media - Adjust the Z-position of side 1

268 Chapter 11 - Media handling VarioPrint 6000 line

Perform a media registration for standard-size media - Adjust the X-length of side 1

Procedure

1. Take the first test sheet. 2. Put the ruler along the line 'D-F' of the test sheet. 3. Align the start of the ruler with point 'D' of the test sheet.

Test bitmap: REGISTRATION

Size: 210 x 297 mm

2006-10-09 / 14:08:36

Page 1

1 Primary image

A C

G I

0 5-

0 0 5

+

3 w

e k

s t

e e

h S

-

B

H

D F

100 0

105 0

1100 1150 120 0

125 0

130 0

135 0

140 0

145 0

150 0

155 0

160 0

165 0

170 0

175 0

180 0

185 0

190 0

195 0

200 0

205 0

210 0

215 0

220 0

225 0

230 0

235 0

240 0

245 0

250 0

255 0

260 0

265 0

270 0

275 0

280 0

-50

0

+50

Prim ary X ima ge p ositi on

Prim ary Z ima ge p ositi on

Prim ary d iamo nd s hap e

X le ngth

L

F

150 0

155 0

160 0

165 0

170 0

175 0

180 0

185 0

190 0

195 0

200 0

205 0

210 0

1 D

-50

0

+50

[94] Align the ruler with 'D''

4. Read the value at point 'F'. 5. Enter the value. 6. Take the second test sheet. 7. Repeat the steps 2 - 5. 8. Take the third test sheet. 9. Repeat the steps 2 - 5.

Perform a media registration for standard-size media - Adjust the X-length of side 1

Chapter 11 - Media handling 269 VarioPrint 6000 line

Perform a media registration for standard-size media - Adjust the Z-position of side 2

Procedure

1. Take the first test sheet. 2. Align the start of the ruler with point 'K' of the test sheet.

T est b

itm ap

: R E

G IS

T R

A T

IO N

S ize: 2

1 0

x 2

9 7

m m

2 0

0 6

-1 0

-0 9

/ 1 4

:0 8

:3 6

P ag

e 2

2 S

eco n d ary

im ag

e

05-

0

05+

2 epahS dno mai D yradnoceS

2

05-

0

05+

1 epahS dno mai D yradnoceS

1 05-

0

05+

noiti sop ega mi X yradnoceS

5

-50

0

+50

Secondary Z image position

4 -50

0

+50

Primary X image position

Primary Z image position

1000

1050

110011501200

1250

1300

1350

1400

1450

1500

1550

1600

1650

1700

1750

1800

1850

1900

1950

2000

2050

2100

2150

2200

2250

2300

2350

2400

2450

2500

2550

2600

2650

2700

2750

2800

Primary diamond shape

X length

K

N L

P

100 0

105 0

1100 1150 120 0

125 0

130 0

135 0

140 0

145 0

150 0

155 0

160 0

165 0

170 0

175 0

180 0

185 0

190 0

195 0

200 0

205 0

210 0

215 0

220 0

225 0

230 0

235 0

240 0

245 0

250 0

255 0

260 0

265 0

-50

0

+50

Prim ary X ima ge p ositi on

Prim ary Z ima ge p ositi on

Prim ary d iamo nd s hap e

X le ngth

L

Secondary Z image positio

-50

0

+50 K

-50

0

+50

[95] Align the ruler with 'K'

3. Read the value at the edge of the test sheet. 4. Enter the value. 5. Take the second test sheet. 6. Repeat the steps 2 - 4. 7. Take the third test sheet. 8. Repeat the steps 2 - 4.

NOTE After step 8, the machine prints another 3 test sheets to measure the X-position of side 1 and side 2.

Perform a media registration for standard-size media - Adjust the Z-position of side 2

270 Chapter 11 - Media handling VarioPrint 6000 line

Perform a media registration for standard-size media - Adjust the X-position of side 1

Procedure

1. Take the first test sheet. 2. Put the ruler along the line 'D-F' of the test sheet. 3. Align the start of the ruler with the left edge of the test sheet.

Test bitmap: REGISTRATION

Size: 210 x 297 mm

2006-10-09 / 14:08:36

Page 1

1 Primary image

A C

G I

0 5-

0 0 5

+

3 w

e ks

t e

e h

S -

B

H

D F

100 0

105 0

1100 1150 120 0

125 0

130 0

135 0

140 0

145 0

150 0

155 0

160 0

165 0

170 0

175 0

180 0

185 0

190 0

195 0

200 0

205 0

210 0

215 0

220 0

225 0

230 0

235 0

240 0

245 0

250 0

255 0

260 0

265 0

270 0

275 0

280 0

-50

0

+50

Prim ary X ima ge p ositi on

Prim ary Z ima ge p ositi on

Prim ary d iamo nd s hap e

X le ngth

L 1

D

-50

0

+50

[96] Align the ruler with the edge of the sheet

4. Read the value at point 'D'. 5. Enter the value. 6. Take the second test sheet. 7. Repeat the steps 2 - 5. 8. Take the third test sheet. 9. Repeat the steps 2 - 5.

Perform a media registration for standard-size media - Adjust the X-position of side 1

Chapter 11 - Media handling 271 VarioPrint 6000 line

Perform a media registration for standard-size media - Adjust the X-position of side 2

Procedure

1. Take the first test sheet. 2. Align the start of the ruler with point 'N' of the test sheet.

Test bitmap: REGISTRATION

Size: 210 x 297 mm

2006-10-09 / 14:08:36

Page 2

2 Secondary image

0 5-

0 0 5

+

2 e

p a

h S

d n

o m

ai D

yr a

d n

o c

e S

2

0 5-

00 5

+

1 e

p a

h S

d n

o m

ai D

yr a

d n

o c

e S

1 0

5-

0 0 5

+

n oi

t i s

o p

e g

a mi

X

y r a

d n

o c

e S

5

-50

0

+50

Secondary Z image position

4 -50

0

+50

Primary X image position

Primary Z image position

100

1050

10

150

120

1250

130

1350

140

1450

150

150

160

1650

170

1750

180

1850

190

1950

200

2050

210

2150

20

250

230

2350

240

2450

250

250

260

2650

270

2750

280

Primary diamond shape

X length

K

NL

P -50

0

+50

Prim ary X ima ge p ositi on

Prim ary Z ima ge p ositi on

0 5-

0 0 5

+

t i s

o p

e g

a mi

X

y r a

d n

o c

e S

5

N

-50

0

+50

[97] Align the ruler with 'N'

3. Read the value at the edge of the test sheet. 4. Enter the value. 5. Take the second test sheet. 6. Repeat the steps 2 - 4. 7. Take the third test sheet. 8. Repeat the steps 2 - 4.

Result

A pop-up message appears. The message asks you whether you want to print an extra test sheet to verify the result of the registration. You can do one of the following. Press [Yes] if you want to print an extra test sheet to verify the result.

Wait for the sheet and check the result. Another pop-up message appears. Press [Yes] if the registration is correct. Press [No] if the registration is not correct. Then the registration procedure will start again.

Press [No] if you do not want to print an extra test sheet. The registration procedure will be finished.

Perform a media registration for standard-size media - Adjust the X-position of side 2

272 Chapter 11 - Media handling VarioPrint 6000 line

Perform a media registration for large media - Print the test sheets and create the ruler

Introduction

The different properties of media can influence the alignment of images when the media are printed. To ensure a correct alignment, you can perform a media registration for each individual media in the [Media catalog]. The following values will be measured. The Z-position of side 1 The X-length of side 1 The Z-position of side 2 The X-position of side 1 The X-position of side 2.

For each media registration, a paper ruler and 3 test sheets will be printed. Depending on the regional setting in the Settings Editor, the paper ruler is printed on A4 or Letter. You can use the first printed sheet to create the paper ruler. However, you can also use a universal ruler of your own. The ruler must be long enough to carry out the measurements. You must carry out each measurement on all 3 test sheets. The system calculates the average value of the measurements.

This section describes how to perform a media registration for large media (media with a length of 390 mm / 15.35" or more).

NOTE It is recommended to perform the media registration when the list of [Scheduled jobs] is empty.

Before you begin

1. On the control panel, press the [System] button. 2. Press [Media]. 3. Select a media from the [Media catalog] for which you want to perform a media registration. 4. Press [Optimize].

When a maintenance PIN is defined in the Settings Editor, a numerical keyboard appears. 5. Enter the maintenance PIN to start the wizard.

NOTE The following procedures often refer to the start of the ruler. The start of the ruler is the line where the shaft of the arrow starts.

Procedure

1. Read the introduction on the screen. Then press [Next]. The printed test sheets go to the system output.

2. Take the first printed sheet.

Perform a media registration for large media - Print the test sheets and create the ruler

Chapter 11 - Media handling 273 VarioPrint 6000 line

3. Fold the sheet along the line 'B-H' on side 1.

T es

t b it

m ap

: R

E G

IS T

R A

T IO

N

S iz

e: 2

1 0 x

2 9 7 m

m

2 0 0 6 -1

0 -0

9 /

1 4 :0

8 :3

6

P ag

e 1 1

P ri

m ar

y i

m ag

e

A G

05-

0

05+

3weksteehS-

B H

D

C

I

F

[98] Fold the sheet to create a ruler

This is your ruler.

T es

t b it

m ap

: R

E G

IS T

R A

T IO

N

S iz

e: 2

1 0 x

2 9 7 m

m

2 0 0 6 -1

0 -0

9

/ 1

4 :0

8 :3

6

P ag

e 1 1

P ri

m ar

y i

m ag

e

A G

05-

0

05+

3weksteehS-

B H

D

T es

t b it

m ap

: R

E G

IS T

R A

T IO

N

S iz

e: 2

1 0 x

2 9 7 m

m

2 0 0 6 -1

0 -0

9

/ 1

4 :0

8 :3

6

P ag

e 1 1

P ri

m ar

y i

m ag

e

A G

B H

D

100 0

105 0

1100 1150 120 0

125 0

130 0

135 0

140 0

145 0

150 0

155 0

160 0

165 0

170 0

175 0

180 0

185 0

190 0

195 0

200 0

205 0

210 0

215 0

220 0

225 0

230 0

235 0

240 0

245 0

250 0

255 0

260 0

265 0

270 0

275 0

280 0

-50

0

+50

Prim ary X ima ge p ositi on

Prim ary Z ima ge p ositi on

Prim ary d iamo nd s hap e

X le ngth

L

[99] The ruler

Perform a media registration for large media - Adjust the Z- position of side 1

Procedure

1. Take the first test sheet. 2. Align the start of the ruler with point 'B' of the test sheet.

T est b

itm ap

: R E

G IS

T R

A T

IO N

S ize: 4

2 0

x 2

9 7

m m

2 0

0 6

-1 0

-0 9

/ 1 4

:0 8

:2 2

P ag

e 1

1 P

rim ary

im ag

e

-5 0 0

+ 5 0 3

- S h

e e

t s k e

w

BH E D

F

100 0

-50

0

+50

Prim ary X ima ge p ositi on

Prim ary Z ima ge p ositi onB

-50

0

+50

[100] Align the ruler with 'B'

3. Read the value at the edge of the test sheet.

Perform a media registration for large media - Adjust the Z-position of side 1

274 Chapter 11 - Media handling VarioPrint 6000 line

4. Enter the value. 5. Take the second test sheet. 6. Repeat the steps 2 - 4. 7. Take the third test sheet. 8. Repeat the steps 2 - 4.

Perform a media registration for large media - Adjust the Z-position of side 1

Chapter 11 - Media handling 275 VarioPrint 6000 line

Perform a media registration for large media - Adjust the X-length of side 1

Procedure

1. Take the first test sheet. 2. Align the start of the ruler with point 'D' and read the value at point 'E'.

Test bitmap: REGISTRATION

Size: 420 x 297 mm

2006-10-09 / 14:08:22

Page 1

1 Primary image

-50

0

+50

3 - Sheet skew

B

H

ED F

100 0

105 0

1100 1150 120 0

125 0

130 0

135 0

140 0

145 0

150 0

155 0

160 0

165 0

170 0

175 0

180 0

185 0

190 0

195 0

200 0

205 0

210 0

215 0

220 0

225 0

230 0

235 0

240 0

245 0

250 0

255 0

260 0

265 0

270 0

275 0

280 0

-50

0

+50

Prim ary X ima ge p ositi on

Prim ary Z ima ge p ositi on

Prim ary d iamo nd s hap e

X le ngth

L1 D

-50

0

+50

E

150 0

155 0

160 0

165 0

170 0

175 0

180 0

185 0

190 0

195 0

200 0

205 0

210 0

[101] Align the ruler with 'D' and read the value at 'E'

3. Open the [Calculator assistant], enter the 'DE' value and press [OK]. 4. Align the start of the ruler with point 'E' and read the value at point 'F'.

Test bitmap: REGISTRATION

Size: 420 x 297 mm

2006-10-09 / 14:08:22

Page 1

1 Primary image

-50

0

+50

3 - Sheet skew

B

H

ED F

100 0

105 0

1100 1150 120 0

125 0

130 0

135 0

140 0

145 0

150 0

155 0

160 0

165 0

170 0

175 0

180 0

185 0

190 0

195 0

200 0

205 0

210 0

215 0

220 0

225 0

230 0

235 0

240 0

245 0

250 0

255 0

260 0

265 0

270 0

275 0

280 0

-50

0

+50

Prim ary X ima ge p ositi on

Prim ary Z ima ge p ositi on

Prim ary d iamo nd s hap e

X le ngth

L

E

-50

0

+50

F

170 0

175 0

180 0

185 0

190 0

195 0

200 0

205 0

210 0

215 0

220 0

225 0

230 0

[102] Align the ruler with 'E' and read the value at 'F'

5. Open the [Calculator assistant], enter the 'EF' value and press [OK]. 6. Take the second test sheet. 7. Repeat the steps 2 - 5. 8. Take the third test sheet. 9. Repeat the steps 2 - 5.

Perform a media registration for large media - Adjust the X-length of side 1

276 Chapter 11 - Media handling VarioPrint 6000 line

Perform a media registration for large media - Adjust the Z- position of side 2

Procedure

1. Take the first test sheet. 2. Align the start of the ruler with point 'K' of the test sheet.

T est b

itm ap

: R E

G IS

T R

A T

IO N

S ize: 4

2 0

x 2

9 7

m m

2 0

0 6

-1 0

-0 9

/ 1 4

:0 8

:2 2

P ag

e 2

2 S

eco n d ary

im ag

e

KP M L

N

100 0

105 0

1100 1150 120 0

125 0

-50

0

+50

Prim ary X ima ge p ositi on

Prim ary Z ima ge p ositi on

Prim ary d iamo nd s hap e

X le ngth

L

K

-50

0

+50

[103] Align the ruler with 'K'

3. Read the value at the edge of the test sheet. 4. Enter the value. 5. Take the second test sheet. 6. Repeat the steps 2 - 4. 7. Take the third test sheet. 8. Repeat the steps 2 - 4.

NOTE After step 8, the machine prints another 3 test sheets to measure the X-position of side 1 and side 2.

Perform a media registration for large media - Adjust the Z-position of side 2

Chapter 11 - Media handling 277 VarioPrint 6000 line

Perform a media registration for large media - Adjust the X- position of side 1

Procedure

1. Take the first test sheet. 2. Put the ruler along the line 'D-F' of the test sheet. 3. Align the start of the ruler with the left edge of the test sheet.

Test bitmap: REGISTRATION

Size: 420 x 297 mm

2006-10-09 / 14:08:22

Page 1

1 Primary image

-50

0

+50

3 - Sheet skew

B

H

ED F

100 0

105 0

1100 1150 120 0

125 0

130 0

135 0

140 0

145 0

150 0

155 0

160 0

165 0

170 0

175 0

180 0

185 0

190 0

195 0

200 0

205 0

210 0

215 0

220 0

225 0

230 0

235 0

240 0

245 0

250 0

255 0

260 0

265 0

270 0

275 0

280 0

-50

0

+50

Prim ary X ima ge p ositi on

Prim ary Z ima ge p ositi on

Prim ary d iamo nd s hap e

X le ngth

L1 D

-50

0

+50

[104] Align the ruler with the edge of the sheet

4. Read the value at point 'D'. 5. Enter the value. 6. Take the second test sheet. 7. Repeat the steps 2 - 5. 8. Take the third test sheet. 9. Repeat the steps 2 - 5.

Perform a media registration for large media - Adjust the X-position of side 1

278 Chapter 11 - Media handling VarioPrint 6000 line

Perform a media registration for large media - Adjust the X- position of side 2

Procedure

1. Take the first test sheet. 2. Align the start of the ruler with point 'N' of the test sheet.

Test bitmap: REGISTRATION

Size: 420 x 297 mm

2006-10-09 / 14:08:22

Page 2

2 Secondary image

K

P

ML N

100 0

105 0

1100 1150 120 0

125 0

-50

0

+50

Prim ary X ima ge p ositi on

Prim ary Z ima ge p ositi on

Prim ary d iamo nd s hap e

X le ngth

L

N

-50

0

+50

[105] Align the ruler with 'N'

3. Read the value at the edge of the test sheet. 4. Enter the value. 5. Take the second test sheet. 6. Repeat the steps 2 - 4. 7. Take the third test sheet. 8. Repeat the steps 2 - 4.

Result

A pop-up message appears. The message asks you whether you want to print an extra test sheet to verify the result of the registration. You can do one of the following. Press [Yes] if you want to print an extra test sheet to verify the result.

Wait for the sheet and check the result. Another pop-up message appears. Press [Yes] if the registration is correct. Press [No] if the registration is not correct. Then the registration procedure will start again.

Press [No] if you do not want to print an extra test sheet. The registration procedure will be finished.

Perform a media registration for large media - Adjust the X-position of side 2

Chapter 11 - Media handling 279 VarioPrint 6000 line

Light-weight media

Introduction

Light-weight media is media with a weight less than 50 g/m. You must handle light-weight media with extra care because light-weight media can be damaged very easily. Even minor irregularities of the light-weight media will lead to a significant reduced reliability and runability. Discard damaged sheets.

The stiffness of light-weight media is very low. To load light-weight media you must know the grain direction.

The allowed light-weight media is given in the acceptable paper list. Contact your local authorized dealer for the latest version.

To print light-weight media the optional light-weight media module must be installed.

Printing jobs with light-weight media

When you print a job that contains media with a weight less than 60 g/m, the system informs you that you must switch to [Low temperature mode], when the system is not in this mode.

When you print a job that contains media with a weight more than 85 g/m, the system informs you that you must switch to normal temperature mode, when the system is not in this mode.

When you print a job that contains media with mixed media weights, the system informs you that you must switch to the temperature mode indicated in the table below, when the system is not in this mode.

Media weight

< 60 g/m 60 - 85 g/m > 85 g/m Temperature mode

X low temperature mode

X X low temperature mode mixed media weight job

X X normal temperature mode mixed media weight job

X low temperature mode or normal temperature mode

X X normal temperature mode mixed media weight job

X normal temperature mode

X X X normal temperature mode mixed media weight job

See Change the advanced media settings - Enable the Low temperature mode on page 261 to switch to [Low temperature mode]. You must switch to the required mode, before you can continue.

Light-weight media

280 Chapter 11 - Media handling VarioPrint 6000 line

Load light-weight media into the paper module

Introduction

IMPORTANT Before you load media into the paper trays, it is important to unpack and carefully check the

stack and sheets. Unpack light-weight media on page 285

Load the media carefully because light-weight media is fragile, especially at the edges. Some light-weight media can be badly cut. This means that sheets stick to each other. After

you loaded the media, loosen the sheets according the instructions below. Follow the instructions below carefully. When you do not load the media correctly, media or

machine damage can occur. Discard damaged sheets.

Before you begin

Before you load light-weight media into the paper trays, insert the light-weight media tool in the side slider at the operator side. The light-weight media tool is located in the door of the paper module.

Load light-weight media into the paper module

Chapter 11 - Media handling 281 VarioPrint 6000 line

Remove the light-weight media tool when there is no light-weight media loaded in the tray. Place the light-weight media tool in the storage location in the door of the paper module.

Make sure that the grain direction of the media is in the transport direction of the printer. When needed, determine the grain direction, see Determine the grain direction of light-weight media on page 287

The humidity of the light-weight media is very important Do not use media that is not wrapped, or not wrapped well. Unpack one ream and load the media before you load another ream. Load media as soon as possible after unpacking.

Do not use media that was stored outside the printer for more than 2 hours. Make sure that the correct media is assigned to the correct paper tray.

Procedure

Action

1 Open the paper tray via the schedule, the trays view or the button on the control panel of the paper module. Only one tray can be open at the same time.

2 Remove the current stack from the tray. Only remove the current stack when you load different media in the tray.

Turn the knob counterclockwise to move the side sliders away from the loaded stack.

Squeeze the green handle of the front slider to move the trailer-edge sliders away from the stack.

Remove the stack. 4

Load light-weight media into the paper module

282 Chapter 11 - Media handling VarioPrint 6000 line

Action

3 Take a new stack of media for loading. Load the media with the grain direction in the transport direction. Carefully put the stack in the middle of the pa- per tray, aligned against the left-hand guide plate. Check the stack after loading. Remove sheets that are shifted or curled during loading.

4 Move the sliders carefully to the stack. Slowly turn the knob clockwise until the side sliders touch the stack without dam- aging it.

Squeeze the green handle of the front slider to move the trailer-edge sliders carefully against the stack without dam- aging it.

5 Unpack the following ream of media. Carefully put the new stack on the already loa- ded stack without adjusting the sliders. Check the stack after loading. Remove sheets that are shifted or curled during loading.

4

Load light-weight media into the paper module

Chapter 11 - Media handling 283 VarioPrint 6000 line

Action

6 IMPORTANT Ensure that the loaded media stack does not exceed the loading limit mark on the back slider.

7 Gently push the paper tray back until it clicks into place.

Load light-weight media into the paper module

284 Chapter 11 - Media handling VarioPrint 6000 line

Unpack light-weight media

Introduction

Before you load media in the paper trays, unpack the media and check the stack.

Before you begin

Only unpack media just before you load the stack into the paper trays. When you leave the media unpacked for a long period, tight edges or waviness can occur.

Procedure

Action

1 Place a ream of media on a flat surface.

2 Fold out the short sides of the packaging.

3 Open the package along the glue strip.

IMPORTANT When you use a knife to open the package be careful not to touch the media.

4 Remove the top sheet and the bottom sheet of the stack. Inspect the four sides of the stack for glue residue. If one of the sides contains glue residue do not use the ream. Remove sheets that have any of the follow- ing types of malformation: bends, folds, cuts, rips, crumpled edges, wavy edges, tight edges, dog ears.

4

Unpack light-weight media

Chapter 11 - Media handling 285 VarioPrint 6000 line

Action

5 Loosen the stack carefully a few times at the four sides and the four corners. Make sure that all sheets are loose.

Unpack light-weight media

286 Chapter 11 - Media handling VarioPrint 6000 line

Determine the grain direction of light-weight media

Introduction

For optimal runnability the grain direction is important. When the grain direction of a certain media is unknown, you must determine the grain direction according to the following procedure.

Procedure

Action

1 Draw rectangles with the transport direction in the long edge feed direction and in the short edge feed direction on a sheet of the media. See the picture.

A

B

2 Cut the two rectangles out of the sheet.

3 Place the two rectangles at the edge of the table as indicated in the picture. The rectangle that bends the least has the highest stiffness. This means that the rectan- gle that bends the least indicates the grain direction, because the stiffness along the grain direction is stronger than in the other direction.

4

Determine the grain direction of light-weight media

Chapter 11 - Media handling 287 VarioPrint 6000 line

Action

4 When rectangle A bends the least, the grain direction is in the direction of the ar- rows, see picture A.

When rectangle B bends the least, the grain direction is perpendicular to the di- rection of the arrows, see picture B.

Picture A

Picture B

Determine the grain direction of light-weight media

288 Chapter 11 - Media handling VarioPrint 6000 line

Chapter 12 Maintain the print system

System configuration

System configuration and maintenance Your organization and print environment can ask for a system configuration that meets production and workflow requirements. In addition, authorization, security and sustainability guidelines are important when you establish a print system.

The installation of the print system includes most configuration tasks, such as definitions of preferences, job workflows and print languages.

It depends on the type of job, if it is necessary to change settings at a later moment.

Configuration tasks for the system administrators and key operators

The configuration settings are available via a web-based configuration tool, the Settings Editor. A part of the Settings Editor settings and information is also available on the System view and Start view of the control panel. You need rights to access configuration settings to change these settings.

[106] The system configuration settings on the control panel

Maintenance tasks for operators

Operators are responsible for refilling the consumables, the removal of staple and punch waste, and manual cleaning tasks.

System configuration

290 Chapter 12 - Maintain the print system VarioPrint 6000 line

Maintenance tasks for maintenance operators

Maintenance operators can perform procedures to clean machine parts or improve the image quality. Furthermore, they are responsible for mechanical maintenance tasks and maintenance procedures via the control panel.

For some procedures you must have the rights to perform maintenance tasks to prevent unauthorized use.

[107] Maintenance tasks on the control panel

System configuration and maintenance

Chapter 12 - Maintain the print system 291 VarioPrint 6000 line

Change a number of settings in the Settings Editor via the control panel

Introduction

NOTE The information contained in this section is primarily intended for key operators and system administrators.

The Settings Editor application on the PRISMAsync controller is a web based application that allows key operators and system administrators to adapt the system to the situation in an organization and production environment. The Settings Editor allows key operators and system administrators to manage settings regarding to network configuration, system preferences, job preferences and media, for example.

For more information see the administration guide PRISMAsync Print Server available at the download site.

For convenience reasons, a subset of frequently used settings is accessible through the control panel. Via a button on the start up screen.

You can access the subset of settings without initialization of the printer or without making a connection to the network.

Via the [Setup] section in the [System] view.

Settings available via the control panel

Group of settings Available settings Short description

[About] [Serial number] (read-only)

[Version of printer software] (read-on- ly)

The [About] section allows you to look up the serial number and software version of the printer.

[Security] [Use of USB device] [System installation

from USB device] [Information win-

dow after system recovery]

[HTTP/HTTPS traf- fic]

[Current IPsec sta- tus]

[Disable IPsec com- munication]

The [Security] section allows you to set the se- curity to the required level. You can prevent unauthorized software up- grade via USB. You can also enable / disable the USB drive. You can configure whether or not you want a confirmation after system recovery. Because a system recovery restores to the previous PRIS- MAsync system working state, it can happen that security settings are lost. You can configure the HTTP/HTTPS traffic and the IPsec communication. 4

Change a number of settings in the Settings Editor via the control panel

292 Chapter 12 - Maintain the print system VarioPrint 6000 line

Group of settings Available settings Short description

[Software updates] [No updates availa- ble]

[New PRISMAsync version {0}Availa- ble{1}]

[New operating sys- tem version {0}Available{1}]

[Install PRISMAsync updates from USB]

[Install PRISMAsync updates from serv- er]

[Uninstall PRISMA- sync update]

[Install operating system update]

[Uninstall operating system update]

[Downgrade system software from USB]

You can download and install PRISMAsync software and operating system software through this section when the service organi- zation has made an update available via On Remote Service (ORS). You can install PRISMAsync software and op- erating system software through this section by a USB device. You can uninstall software updates through this section. Follow the instructions on the control panel when you install or uninstall soft- ware updates. See the administration guide PRISMAsync Print Server how to configure, download and install software updates.

[Licenses] [Install license from remote server]

[Install license from USB device]

When you have a new license to activate a new feature on the printer, you can upload the license through this section. After uploading the license, the feature becomes active. You can only use this section after you inser- ted an USB drive in an USB port of the PRIS- MAsync controller or on the control panel. Follow the instructions on the control panel when you upload the license.

[Backups] [Configure confi- dential data]

[Creation date last backup] (read-only)

[Create backup] [Export backup to

USB device] [Delete backup]

The system administrator can make a backup of the configuration of the print system. The system administrator can use this backup a/o to restore the configuration or for fleet man- agement.

[Restore] [Import backup from USB device]

[Restore complete configuration]

[Restore engine configuration]

[Restore user con- figuration]

A user can restore the user configuration. The user configuration consists of workflow set- tings like AWF and DocBox and other settings that are not related to the hardware of the sys- tem. For example you can use the user config- uration for fleet management. Only service can restore the complete configu- ration or the service configuration. 4

Change a number of settings in the Settings Editor via the control panel

Chapter 12 - Maintain the print system 293 VarioPrint 6000 line

Group of settings Available settings Short description

[Logging and reports] [Create and export log file with report / trace files]

[Create and export log file with report files]

[Export log file to USB device]

[Print configuration report]

When an error occurs, the help desk of your printer supplier can ask you to create and send a log file with trace files and/or report files. You can save the log file to a USB device. The configuration report contains information about the configuration of your printing sys- tem, for example information about the sys- tem configuration, controller configuration and network settings. You can print the configura- tion report for backup purposes, for example. Follow the instructions on the control panel when you save a file or print a report.

[Connectivity] [MAC address] (read-only)

[Hostname] [Link speed and du-

plex settings] IPv4 settings IPv6 settings DNS settings WINS settings [Test TCP/IP con-

nection] [HTTP port] [HTTPS port]

The [Connectivity] section contains the main settings to integrate the printer into a network. After you have adapted the network settings, you can test the connection from here. Follow the instructions on the control panel when you adapt the network settings.

[Proxy server] [Proxy server us- age]

[Proxy server name]

[Proxy server port] [Proxy server au-

thentication] [Proxy server au-

thentication type] [Username for

proxy authentica- tion]

[Password for proxy authentica- tion]

[Proxy server do- main]

The [Proxy server] section contains the set- tings to configure the proxy server. Follow the instructions on the control panel when you adapt the proxy server settings.

4

Change a number of settings in the Settings Editor via the control panel

294 Chapter 12 - Maintain the print system VarioPrint 6000 line

Group of settings Available settings Short description

[Remote connection] (optional)

[Remote connection status] (read-only)

[Remote connection enabled]

[ID of Service org. (SOID)]

[Test remote con- nection]

The [Remote connection] section (optional) contains the settings to enable the remote con- nection and to configure the Remote Service.

NOTE Only Service can adapt the remote connection settings. After Service adapts the remote connection set- tings, you can test the remote con- nection with this setting.

[System settings] [Date and time] [System of meas-

urement] [Media weight] [Time zone] [Show install wiz-

ard after next start- up]

The [System settings] section contains a/o set- tings to change the date and time of the sys- tem, or the system of measurement used. When you change the system of measure- ment, all corresponding values on the system will be changed. For example, when you change [Metric] into [Imperial], all length val- ues will be displayed in inches. You can also indicate how the media weight is displayed.

Procedure

NOTE You need to have access rights to make changes in this section.

1. Touch [System] -> [Setup] -> [System configuration] (below the [Advanced] bar). 2. Touch the button of the group that contains the setting you want to change or view. 3. Touch the required setting. 4. Look up the required information or make the required changes. 5. If you make a change, touch [OK] to confirm. 6. Press [Close].

Change a number of settings in the Settings Editor via the control panel

Chapter 12 - Maintain the print system 295 VarioPrint 6000 line

Introduction to the [Setup] section

Introduction

The [System] view gives access to system settings, system information, media information and maintenance tasks.

This section gives an overview of the [Setup] section in the [System] view.

Overview of the [Setup] section

[108] Overview of the [Setup] section

The items of the [Setup] section

Item Function

[Workflow] Display the main settings of the current workflow profile. These settings are read-only.

[Workflow profile] button Define a workflow profile that matches your needs.

[Language] button Change the language of the control panel.

[Warning time] button Define the moment when the system warns you about an action that is required soon, for example 10 minutes in advance. The warning is displayed in the dashboard and indicated through the operator attention light. 4

Introduction to the [Setup] section

296 Chapter 12 - Maintain the print system VarioPrint 6000 line

Item Function

[Job name truncation] but- ton

Define the way the system shortens the job name when the job name is too long to display fully.

[Control panel settings] button

Adjust the brightness and contrast of the control panel.

[Shut down printer] button Shut down the system in a controlled way.

[Advanced media settings] button

Define a number of special media-related settings. Change the advanced media settings on page 261

[Intermediate check print] button

Print a test sheet of a running job to check the quality.

[PrintGuard module] but- ton

Enable or disable the use of the PrintGuard (optional).

[System configuration] but- ton

Get direct access to a number of important key operator settings in the Settings Editor on the PRISMAsync controller. Change a number of settings in the Settings Editor via the control panel on page 292

Introduction to the [Setup] section

Chapter 12 - Maintain the print system 297 VarioPrint 6000 line

Backup and restore

Introduction

The system administrator can make a backup of the configuration of the print system. The system administrator can use this backup a/o to restore the configuration. After a hardware failure, for example a crash of the hard disk. After installation of a new version of the software.

The system administrator can use the backup also for fleet management. The system administrator configures one system and makes a backup. Then the system administrator restores the backup at other systems.

Backup and restore are part of the system configuration. System configuration is available on the System view and the Start view of the control panel.

You can also make a backup and restore a backup via the Settings Editor.

Refer to the PRISMAsync Print Server administration guide for a detailed description of backup and restore.

Backup and restore

298 Chapter 12 - Maintain the print system VarioPrint 6000 line

Counters

Introduction to the [Maintenance] section

Introduction

The [System] view gives access to system settings, system information, media information and maintenance tasks.

This section gives an overview of the [Maintenance] section in the [System] view.

Overview of the [Maintenance] section

[109] Overview of the [Maintenance] section

The items of the [Maintenance] section

Description of the [Maintenance] section

Item Function More information

[Billing counters] Indicate the total number of prints that have been made since the print- er was installed . You cannot reset the billing counters.

General counter informa- tion on page 301

4

Counters

Chapter 12 - Maintain the print system 299 VarioPrint 6000 line

Item Function More information

[Day counters] Indicates the number of prints that have been made since the latest re- set. You can always reset the day counters.

Reset the day counters on page 301

[Toner counters] Indicates the amount of toner that has been used since the printer was installed. You cannot reset the toner counter.

[Go to maintenance tasks] Open the list of the suggested or re- quired maintenance tasks.

NOTE Only a trained and certified operator is allowed to per- form the maintenance tasks.

Introduction to the [Maintenance] section

300 Chapter 12 - Maintain the print system VarioPrint 6000 line

Introduction to the counters

Introduction

The [Maintenance] section of the [System] view displays 3 types of counters. 2 of these counters provide information about the number of sheets that have been printed. The other counter provides information about the amount of toner that has been used.

General counter information

The following table describes the counters in the [Maintenance] section of the [System] view.

Type of counter Description

[Billing counters] The [Billing counters] section displays the total number of prints that have been made since the machine was installed. You cannot reset the billing counters.

[Day counters] The [Day counters] section displays the number of prints that have been made since the counter was last reset to 0. You can, for example, reset the day counters at the beginning of a working day or before you start a new job for a particular customer.

[Toner counters] The [Toner counters] section displays the amount of toner that has been used since the machine was installed. You cannot reset the toner counter.

The [Billing counters] and the [Day counters] provide information about the number of 1-sided and 2-sided prints that have been made on standard-size and large media. The length of the media determines whether a media is standard size or large. Media with a length of less than 390 mm (15.35") are referred to and counted as standard-size media. Media with a length of 390 mm (15.35") or more are referred to and counted as large media.

The control panel displays the media icon ( or ) as a small icon for standard-size media. For large media, the media icon is big. The media icon is used in various places on the control panel, for example in the [Counters] section, in the [Trays] view and in the job information.

Introduction to the counters

Chapter 12 - Maintain the print system 301 VarioPrint 6000 line

Reset the day counters

Procedure

1. On the control panel, touch [System] -> [Maintenance] -> [Reset day counters]. A dialog box will ask you to confirm that you really want to reset the day counters.

2. Touch [Yes] to reset the day counters to 0.

Reset the day counters

302 Chapter 12 - Maintain the print system VarioPrint 6000 line

Print the Billing Counters Report

Introduction

You can print a report that contains all figures of the configured billing counters. The language of the billing counters report is the same as the selected language for the system.

Illustration

[110] Print the billing counters report

Procedure

1. On the control panel, touch [System] -> [Maintenance] -> [Print billing counters report].

Print the Billing Counters Report

Chapter 12 - Maintain the print system 303 VarioPrint 6000 line

Software updates Software updates can be operating system updates or PRISMAsync updates. Operating system updates are updates from Microsoft. PRISMAsync updates are updates from the Canon Service organization.

Three methods are available to update your software: 1. Pushed by the service organization through On Remote Service (ORS). 2. Made available via "http://downloads.cpp.canon". 3. From Microsoft server or from the WSUS server of your company. Only operating system

updates.

To configure, download, and install operating system updates, you need to have the access right: [Access to installation tasks].

See the administration guide PRISMAsync Print Server available at the download site.

Software updates

304 Chapter 12 - Maintain the print system VarioPrint 6000 line

Remote Service (ORS) (optional)

Remote Service

Introduction

NOTE Remote Service requires a license. Remote Service also requires a permission to Canon or your printer dealer site outside the customer domain, either via a proxy server or via IP white list. Contact your local IT specialist to give you the permission.

Remote Service is an application that runs on a printer. Remote Service requires a working Internet connection to establish a secure connection between the customer's site and printer dealer. In case a proxy server is present, Remote Service must be configured correctly. Refer to the documentation of On Remote Service for the possibilities and use of this product.

Remote Service has the following functionality:

Functionality Description

Remote Assistance With this function, Canon or your printer dealer can take over the control panel of the printer remotely to assist in case of a problem for example.

Remote Diagnostics When a customer contacts Canon or the printer dealer in case of a problem, Canon can automatically retrieve service-related data from the printer for analysis and troubleshooting. With these data, Canon or your printer dealer can quickly identify the source of the problem and possibly solve the problem via the telephone.

Remote Meter Reading With this function, counter-information that is needed for billing can be automatically sent to Canon or the printer dealer on a regu- lar basis. Then the customer does not need to collect the meter readings manually and send these to Canon or the printer dealer. The customer can always check the sent data and approve the me- ter readings.

Remote Software Upgrade With this function, the customer can update the printer with the latest software. The software is only retrieved from Canon or the printer dealer when the customer wants this. From release 3.2 onwards, the jobs on the system are not deleted after you upgraded the software.

Using Remote Service

In the Settings Editor, all settings for the customer's proxy server must be set correctly ([Configuration] -> [Connectivity] -> [Proxy server]).

Via the control panel, the remote connection must be enabled ([System] -> [Setup] ->[System configuration] -> [Remote connection] -> [Remote connection enabled] -> [Yes]).

Via the control panel, you can test the remote connection ([System] -> [Setup] ->[System configuration] -> [Remote connection] -> [Test remote connection]). The test can take up to 30 seconds. When the connection is not OK, a message indicates the reason for the failure.

Remote Service (ORS) (optional)

Chapter 12 - Maintain the print system 305 VarioPrint 6000 line

The dashboard of the control panel displays a red icon when the printer becomes disconnected from the Internet. Make sure the connection is online, because otherwise Canon or the printer dealer cannot retrieve data from your printer.

If required, you can change a number of connectivity settings via the control panel ([System] -> [Setup] ->[System configuration] -> [Connectivity]).

You can verify the communication with Canon or the printer dealer by creating a log file via the Settings Editor.

Remote Service

306 Chapter 12 - Maintain the print system VarioPrint 6000 line

Keeping the printer running

Introduction to the [Printer] section

Introduction

The [System] view gives access to system settings, system information, media information and maintenance tasks.

This section gives an overview of the [Printer] section in the [System] view.

The items of the [Printer] section

Description of the [Printer] section

Item Function More information

[Toner] Indicate the filling level of the left- hand and right-hand toner unit.

Check the status of the to- ner reservoirs on page 308

[Finisher] Indicate the number of staples that the stapler of the finisher has used since the last refill.

Check the status of the sta- pler cartridges on page 310

[Stacker/stapler] Indicates the number of staples that the stapler of the stacker/stapler has used since the last replacement.

Check the status of the sta- pler cartridges on page 310

[External finisher] Indicate whether the optional exter- nal finisher is on-line or off-line.

Keeping the printer running

Chapter 12 - Maintain the print system 307 VarioPrint 6000 line

Check the status of the toner reservoirs

Introduction

The machine has 2 toner reservoirs. The toner reservoirs are located at the left-hand side and the right-hand side of the engine module Introduction to the main system components on page 17. You can check the status of the toner reservoirs in the dashboard The dashboard on page 239 and in the [System] view. The [System] view also displays the current filling level of each toner reservoir as a percentage. The icons in the following table indicate the status of the toner reservoirs.

This section gives an overview of the possible toner statuses. Furthermore, this section describes how to check the status.

The meaning of the toner icons

The toner icons

Toner icon Description

The toner icon is blue. All 3 blocks of the status bar are green. The to- ner reservoir is filled over 75%. Do not add toner.

The toner icon is blue. 2 Blocks of the status bar are green. The toner reservoir is filled over 50%. You can add 1 bottle of toner.

The toner icon is blue. 1 Block of the status bar is green. The toner res- ervoir is filled over 25%. You can add 2 bottles of toner.

The toner icon is orange. The status bar contains no more green blocks. The toner reservoir is filled less than 25%. The printer can print another 600 sheets. You must add up to 3 toner bottles as soon as pos- sible.

The toner icon is red. The status bar has a red frame. The toner reser- voir is empty. The printing stops. You must add maximum 3 toner bot- tles to continue the printing.

The toner icon is grayed out. The status of the toner reservoir is un- known. This status is only displayed when the system is initializing.

The toner icon is grayed out and has a blue dotted frame. The status bar is grayed out and has a red dotted frame. The status of the toner reservoir is unknown. This status is only displayed when the toner ac- cess cover is open.

Procedure

1. Check the toner icons in the dashboard.

NOTE Follow the steps 2 and 3 to view the status of the toner reservoirs as a percentage.

2. Touch the [System] button. 3. Press [Printer].

The [System] view displays the current filling level of the toner reservoirs as a percentage. The percentage matches the blocks that are indicated in the dashboard.

Check the status of the toner reservoirs

308 Chapter 12 - Maintain the print system VarioPrint 6000 line

Add toner

Introduction

This section describes how to add toner to the 2 toner reservoirs of the machine.

When to do

When a toner reservoir is empty or almost empty Check the status of the toner reservoirs on page 308.

IMPORTANT Only use the VarioPrint 6000 toner.

IMPORTANT Never add more than 3 bottles at a time. The status bars of the toner indicators indicate the amount of bottles you are allowed to fill.

IMPORTANT The printer must be switched on to add the toner. You can add toner while the printer is busy.

Procedure

1. Shake the toner bottle well (see the instructions on the bottle). 2. Remove the screw cap from the bottle.

IMPORTANT Do not remove the seal from the bottle.

3. Open the front door of the toner reservoir you want to fill.

[111] Open the front doors

4. Open the lid of the toner reservoir. 5. Put the toner bottle into the opening of the toner reservoir.

NOTE The toner bottle only fits one way.

6. When the toner bottle is empty, carefully tilt the toner bottle into the horizontal position. Make sure that the opening of the toner bottle remains over the opening of the toner reservoir.

7. Rotate the toner bottle a half turn to the right to remove the residual toner. 8. Remove the toner bottle. 9. Close the lid of the toner reservoir. 10. Close the front door of the toner reservoir.

Add toner

Chapter 12 - Maintain the print system 309 VarioPrint 6000 line

Check the status of the staple cartridges

Introduction

The optional finishers The output locations on page 21 can contain staple cartridges to staple your jobs. You can check the status of the staple cartridges in the dashboard The dashboard on page 239 and in the [System] view. The [System] view also displays the number of staples that have been used since the last refill. The icons in the following table indicate the status of the staple cartridges.

NOTE The numbers 1 and 2 below the stapler icons indicate which of the staple cartridges of the finisher is empty. When your configuration also contains the stacker/stapler or when your configuration only contains the stacker/stapler, the numbers are not visible in the dashboard.

NOTE Only when the staple level is low or when one of the staple cartridges is empty, the status is visible in the dashboard.

The meaning of the stapler icons

The stapler icons

Stapler icon Description

The stapler icon is blue. The staple cartridges are filled.

The stapler icon is orange. The staple level in one of the staple cartridg- es is low Replace the stapler cartridges on page 311.

The stapler icon is red. One of the staple cartridges is empty. The print- er stops.

Procedure

1. Check the stapler icon in the dashboard.

NOTE Follow the steps 2 and 3 to view the number of staples that have been used since the last refill.

2. Touch the [System] button. 3. Press [Printer].

The [System] view displays the status of the staple cartridges. The [System] view also displays the number of staples that have been used since the last refill.

Check the status of the staple cartridges

310 Chapter 12 - Maintain the print system VarioPrint 6000 line

Finisher: Add staples

Introduction

The optional finisher The output locations on page 21 on top of the stacker can staple your jobs. The finisher contains 2 staplers. Both staplers are located inside the finisher. Stapler 1 is located at the back side. Stapler 2 is located at the front side.

This section describes how to add staples.

NOTE You can add short and long staples. It is important to add the correct staples. Use short staples if your documents contain fewer than 50 sheets. Use long staples when your documents contain more than 50 sheets. Only use staples of type S25 (long staples) or S37 (short staples).

When to do

When a staple cartridge is empty or almost empty Check the status of the stapler cartridges on page 310.

Get access to the staplers

Procedure

1. Open the front door of the finisher. 2. Open top cover E1. 3. Open cover E5. 4. Lock cover E5 with the locking mechanism E6. 5. If required, slide stapler 1 to the centre. This makes the access to the cartridge holder in stapler 1

easier.

Finisher: Add staples

Chapter 12 - Maintain the print system 311 VarioPrint 6000 line

Add staples

Procedure

1. Remove the cartridge holder from the stapler. 2. Press the striped release buttons at both sides of the cartridge holder to unlock the lower cover.

[112] Press the 2 release buttons simultaneously

The lower cover opens.

[113] The lower cover opens

Add staples

312 Chapter 12 - Maintain the print system VarioPrint 6000 line

3. Remove the empty staple cartridge in the opposite direction of the arrow.

[114] Remove the staple cartridge

4. Slide a new staple cartridge into the cartridge holder, in the direction of the arrow.

[115] Place a new staple cartridge

Add staples

Chapter 12 - Maintain the print system 313 VarioPrint 6000 line

5. Push the staple cartridge into the cartridge holder until the cartridge clicks into place.

[116] Firmly push the staple cartridge into the holder

6. Remove the paper ribbon that secures the staples in the staple cartridge.

[117] Remove the paper ribbon

7. Close the lower cover. 8. Place the cartridge holder in the stapler.

Add staples

314 Chapter 12 - Maintain the print system VarioPrint 6000 line

Close the doors and covers

Procedure

1. Hold cover E5 while you unlock E6. 2. Close cover E5. 3. Close top cover E1. 4. Close the front door of the finisher.

Close the doors and covers

Chapter 12 - Maintain the print system 315 VarioPrint 6000 line

Close the doors and covers

316 Chapter 12 - Maintain the print system VarioPrint 6000 line

Chapter 13 PRISMAlytics Dashboard

PRISMAlytics Dashboard is a set of business management tools for your PRISMAsync printers. To use PRISMAlytics Dashboard Remote Service (ORS) must be enabled on the printers. PRISMAsync printers send real-time production information, such as printing times, idle times, and the usage of media and consumables to the PRISMAlytics Dashboard.

With PRISMAlytics Dashboard you can monitor the performance of your printer fleet. You can analyze utilization, production output and used consumables per printer. You can also see the idle time, the waiting time for the operator, the number of paper jams, and used media statistics.

Refer to the documentation of PRISMAlytics Dashboard for the possibilities and use of this product.

318 Chapter 13 - PRISMAlytics Dashboard VarioPrint 6000 line

Chapter 14 Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting

Introduction

The main types of possible errors are the following. Errors that relate to the machine Errors that relate to the jobs Toner problems that relate to the use of fiber-rich media.

This section gives an overview of the possible errors and the solutions to these errors.

NOTE Only operators who received the special maintenance training are allowed to replace or clean parts and solve paper jams in the process units.

Overview of the possible machine errors

Handle the machine errors

Error Solution Additional information

Paper jam Follow the instructions on the control panel.

After you solved the error, the machine starts from the point where the printing stopped due to the error. Please check for double prints.

Software error Follow the instructions on the control panel.

A message on the control panel will indicate that you must restart the machine.

Service required Follow the instructions on the control panel.

A message on the control panel will indicate that you must call Service.

Maintenance re- quired

Follow the instructions on the control panel.

The maintenance wizard appears. You need to have access rights to perform maintenance tasks.

NOTE Only trained operators are allowed to perform maintenance tasks.

Unit recondition- ing

Follow the instructions on the control panel.

After an error was solved, the machine checks if the print job can continue from the point where the printing stopped. When you use cy- clic media, you must probably remove a cou- ple of sheets.

The system can- not determine if the output is complete

Follow the instructions on the control panel and check the output.

The system can sometimes not determine if the output is complete. Then you must check the output. Touch the [OK] button when the output is complete.

Troubleshooting

320 Chapter 14 - Troubleshooting VarioPrint 6000 line

Overview of Possible Job Errors

Handle job errors

Error Solution Additional information

The required sup- plies are not available

Add the required supplies (media, toner and staples) before the machine stops printing.

The dashboard helps you to determine when the supplies are required.

The defined com- bination of job settings is not possible

The controller corrects the settings.

You must define a cor- rect combination of job settings in the [Edit] sec- tion of the [Jobs] view on the control panel.

The solution depends on the place where the job settings are defined. When the job settings are defined in an ap-

plication or printer driver, the controller au- tomatically corrects the settings.

When you define the job settings on the control panel, the control panel displays a message that the defined combination is not possible. The [OK] button is disabled.

Overview of the possible toner pollution problems using media with high amounts of paper dust

When you use media with a high amount of paper dust, you can have problems with toner pollution of the prints right after the automatic black image cleaning procedure. Therefore it is advised to enable the [Paper quality test] (see Change the advanced media settings - Start the Paper quality test on page 265) each time when a new batch of media is used. This is to be sure that the correct [Paper quality] setting is still at the right level for this new batch.

Toner pollution problem Solution

Toner pollution on the first sheets af- ter the automatic black image clean- ing procedure.

Change the [Paper quality] setting from [Normal] to [Low] (see Change the advanced media settings - Change the Paper quality on page 264).

Use the [Paper quality test] to determine if this new setting is the right cleaning mode for this media.

The sheets of the 5th set must be totally toner free, al- so at the edges of the media size width.

When these sheets still show toner pollution, you can set the [Paper quality] setting to [Lower] (see Change the advanced media settings - Change the Paper qual- ity on page 264).

Use the [Paper quality test] to verify that this new set- ting is the right cleaning mode for this media. 4

Troubleshooting

Chapter 14 - Troubleshooting 321 VarioPrint 6000 line

Toner pollution problem Solution

Toner pollution on the first sheets along the edge of the sheet (2-3 mm) after the automatic black image cleaning procedure.

Change the [Paper quality] setting from [Normal] to [Low] (see Change the advanced media settings - Change the Paper quality on page 264).

Use the [Paper quality test] to determine if this new setting is the right cleaning mode for this media.

The sheets of the 5th set must be totally toner free, al- so at the edges of the media size width.

When these sheets still show toner pollution, you can set the [Paper quality] setting to [Lower] (see Change the advanced media settings - Change the Paper qual- ity on page 264).

Use the [Paper quality test] to verify that this new set- ting is the right cleaning mode for this media.

NOTE When the peripheral pollution mainly occurs at 1 side of the sheet, it is advised to rotate the media in the paper tray by 180 degrees.

A combination of the above pollu- tions.

Change the [Paper quality] setting from [Normal] to [Low] (see Change the advanced media settings - Change the Paper quality on page 264).

Use the [Paper quality test] to determine if this new setting is the right cleaning mode for this media.

The sheets of the 5th set must be totally toner free, al- so at the edges of the media size width.

When these sheets still show toner pollution, you can set the [Paper quality] setting to [Lower] (see Change the advanced media settings - Change the Paper qual- ity on page 264).

Use the [Paper quality test] to verify that this new set- ting is the right cleaning mode for this media.

Ghost images in mid and high toner coverage areas.

Change the [Paper quality] setting from [Normal] to [Low] (see Change the advanced media settings - Change the Paper quality on page 264).

If the print quality is still not optimal with respect to mentioned ghost images, you can set the [Paper qual- ity] setting to [Lower] (see Change the advanced me- dia settings - Change the Paper quality on page 264).

Troubleshooting

322 Chapter 14 - Troubleshooting VarioPrint 6000 line

Troubleshooting for light-weight media

Introduction

When the optional light-weight media module is installed, you can print light-weight media. Next to the general troubleshooting, you have some additional troubleshooting related to the light- weight media module.

This section gives an overview of the possible errors related to the light-weight media module and the solutions to these errors.

NOTE Only operators who received the special maintenance training are allowed to replace or clean parts and solve paper jams in the process units.

Overview of the possible machine errors

Handle the machine errors

Error Solution Additional information

Maintenance re- quired: Remove the sheets from the TTF

Follow the instructions on the control panel.

CAUTION The TTF area can be hot.

The maintenance wizard appears. You need to have access rights to perform maintenance tasks. In some cases you must remove the air guid- ance unit to remove sheets under this unit. You must visually check if you must remove the unit, the system cannot indicate if the re- moval is necessary.

NOTE Only trained operators are allowed to perform maintenance tasks.

Maintenance re- quired: Replace the air filters.

Follow the instructions on the control panel.

The maintenance wizard appears. You need to have access rights to perform maintenance tasks.

NOTE Only trained operators are allowed to perform maintenance tasks.

Troubleshooting for the light-weight media module

Problem Solution

Frequent paper jam at the air guid- ance unit.

Check the air filter of the light-weight media module. When needed, replace the filter.

Check the air infrastructure and the connection to the machine.

MORPE before the job. Check the valve of the air infrastructure and the con- nection to the machine. 4

Troubleshooting for light-weight media

Chapter 14 - Troubleshooting 323 VarioPrint 6000 line

Problem Solution

Frequent paper jams in the paper in- put modules.

Check the stack of sheets in the paper tray.

Check the filter of the light-weight media module

NOTE Only trained operators are allowed to perform maintenance tasks.

Action

1 You can only check the filter when the sys- tem is printing or when the system indicates that you should check the air filters. This is indicated by the orange maintenance icon. When the system is not printing or the sys- tem is not performing the maintenance task described below, the indicator of the filter is green, independently of the status of the fil- ter.

2 Check the indicator of the filter of the light- weight media module at the rear side of the machine. You can check the indicator when the main- tenance icon is orange but you can also check the indicator when the maintenance indicator is not displayed. Maintenance icon is orange:

1. When the maintenance icon is orange, go to the maintenance task [Check the status of the air filters].

2. Start the maintenance task. 3. Check the indicator at the rear side of

the machine. When the indicator is green, do not

replace the filter. When the indicator is red, replace

all 4 filters. 4. Answer the question about the re-

placement of the air filters. Maintenance icon is not displayed:

1. Make sure that the system is printing, otherwise the indicator is green, inde- pendently of the status of the filter.

2. Check the indicator at the rear side of the machine. When the indicator is green, do not

replace the filter. When the indicator is red, replace

all 4 filters. See below.

Troubleshooting for light-weight media

324 Chapter 14 - Troubleshooting VarioPrint 6000 line

Replace the filter of the light-weight media module

NOTE Only trained operators are allowed to perform maintenance tasks.

Action

1 Move the handle up to shut off the incoming air.

2 Remove the upper cover of the filter unit. 1. Remove the two screws. 2. Remove the upper cover.

3 Remove all 4 filters. 1. Push the blue locking down. 2. Rotate the cover clockwise about 30.

You must use force. 3. Pull the cover downwards. 4. Remove the filter.

4 Install 4 new filters. 1. Install the new filter. 2. Install the cover upwards. 3. Rotate the cover anticlockwise about 30.

You must use force. 4. Push the blue locking up.

5 Install the upper cover of the filter unit. 4

Troubleshooting for light-weight media

Chapter 14 - Troubleshooting 325 VarioPrint 6000 line

Action

6 Move the handle down to switch on the in- coming air.

Troubleshooting for light-weight media

326 Chapter 14 - Troubleshooting VarioPrint 6000 line

Store the logging in case of software errors

Introduction

When the system has a software error, you can store the logging. Service can use this logging to analyse the error.

Procedure

1. On the control panel an error screen is visible that indicates a software error. A software error has an error code that starts with 115. The system creates a log. This may take a few minutes. After the creation of the log is complete, you can insert a USB drive into the USB port at the left- hand side of the control panel. When you do not want to store the logging of the software error, you can touch the error screen to exit the error. The system restarts. Only non-recoverable software errors will store the error log.

2. Touch the USB drive button on the error screen. The systems stores the logging of the error on the USB drive.

3. When the systems indicates that the storing is completed, remove the USB drive. 4. Touch the error screen to exit the error. The system restarts.

NOTE When the system has two identical software errors after each other, you can delete all jobs. If one or more jobs caused the software error, the system restarts without an error.

NOTE If the system experiences three identical software errors, one after another the system reinstalls the software upon restarting. Reinstallation will take a while.

Store the logging in case of software errors

Chapter 14 - Troubleshooting 327 VarioPrint 6000 line

Create and download a log file This topics contains the following instructions. Manually create a log file with reports / trace files in Settings Editor Download a log file from Settings Editor Create a log file on control panel Export a log file to USB device from control panel Create a log file from PRISMAsync Remote Manager

Understand log file names

The log file names are composed of several parts depending on the contents.

_ TraceData_ _ Reports / trace file manually created by a user at specified time on the specified sys- tem.

_ Reports_ _ Reports file manually created by a user at specified time on the specified system.

_ TraceData_ _ _

Reports / trace file created by the specified system for a printer error at specified time.

Manually create a log file with reports / trace files in Settings Editor

To create the log file with reports / trace files, you use the [Create log file with report / trace files] option. Create this log file immediately after a print error occurs.

NOTE Only create the alternative log file, using the [Create log file with report files] option, on request of the Service organization.

1. Open the Settings Editor and go to: [Support][Troubleshooting].

[118] [Troubleshooting] tab

2. In the [Logging and reports] option group, click [Create log file with report / trace files].

3. In the [Log file with report / trace files (create and download)] dialog box, click [Create log file with report / trace files] to create a new log file.

Create and download a log file

328 Chapter 14 - Troubleshooting VarioPrint 6000 line

[119] Create a log file with report / trace files

4. Click [OK].

Download a log file from Settings Editor

Log files can be created manually or automatically by the printer when an error occurred.

1. Open the Settings Editor and go to: [Support][Troubleshooting].

[120] [Troubleshooting] tab

2. In the [Logging and reports] option group, click [Create log file with report / trace files].

3. In the dialog box, click the required log file to download the file.

[121] Create or download log file with report / trace files

4. Store the log file on an external location. 5. Click [OK].

Create a log file on control panel

To create the log file with reports / trace files, you use the [Create log file with report / trace files] option. Create this log file immediately after a print error occurs.

NOTE Only create the alternative log file, using the [Create log file with report files] option, on request of the Service organization.

Create and download a log file

Chapter 14 - Troubleshooting 329 VarioPrint 6000 line

1. On the control panel touch: [System][Setup][System configuration][Logging and reports].

[122] System configuration

NOTE You can also touch [System configuration] at the start screen of the control panel and touch [System configuration].

[123] Start screen of control panel

2. Insert a USB device into a USB port of the control panel. 3. Touch [Create] in the [Create and export log file with report / trace files].

Create and download a log file

330 Chapter 14 - Troubleshooting VarioPrint 6000 line

4. The log file is being created.

5. The last created log file is selected in the [Export log file] dialog box.

[124] Export log file

6. Touch [OK] to export this log file to the USB device. Touch [Cancel] to download this log file at a later moment.

Create and download a log file

Chapter 14 - Troubleshooting 331 VarioPrint 6000 line

Export a log file to USB device from control panel

You can export a manually or automatically created log file to a USB device. 1. On the control panel touch: [System][Setup][System configuration][Logging and

reports].

NOTE You can also touch [System configuration] at the start screen of the control panel.

2. Insert a USB device into a USB port of the control panel. 3. Press [Export].

[125] Export log file

4. Select the required log file.

[126] Select log file

5. Touch [OK] to export the log file to the USB device.

Create and download a log file

332 Chapter 14 - Troubleshooting VarioPrint 6000 line

Create a log file from PRISMAsync Remote Manager

1. In the top right-hand menu, click [Support][Create log file].

[127] Support options

2. You are forwarded to the [Create log file with report / trace files] option of the Settings Editor that belongs to the selected printer.

3. When requested, log in to the Settings Editor. Use the first two instructions of this topic how to create and download the log file.

Create and download a log file

Chapter 14 - Troubleshooting 333 VarioPrint 6000 line

Create and download a log file

334 Chapter 14 - Troubleshooting VarioPrint 6000 line

Chapter 15 Specifications

Product specifications

NOTE The media specifications in the following table are based on plain paper of 80 g/m or 20 lb bond.

Overview of the main product specifications

Product specifications

Item Specification

Description B&W printer for heavy production printing environments

Technology Gemini Instant Duplex technology

Supported media sizes Minimum 203 mm x 203 mm Maximum 320 mm x 488 mm

When the Flex-XL PIM paper input module is installed: Upper trays

Minimum 203 mm x 203 mm Maximum 320 mm x 488 mm

Flex-XL trays (bulk tray) Minimum 208 mm x 203 mm Maximum 350 mm x 500 mm

Supported media weights 45 - 50 g/m with the optional light-weight media module

50 - 300 g/m for Canon recommended media 60 - 200 g/m for other media 70 - 160 g/m for media size 350 mm x 500 mm; only

plain paper

See the acceptable paper list. Contact your local author- ized dealer for the latest version.

Toner VarioPrint 6000 toner

Warm-up time 11 minutes, cold startup from 20 C

First print time 16 seconds

Certificates RoHS, Cetecom / CE Class A, FCC Class A, UL / TV / CE, China RoHS, CB report Section 508, De-inkability certificate, C-tick Australia (sourced locally)

Printing

Item Specification

Job Management DocBox, lists of [Scheduled jobs], [Waiting jobs] and [Printed jobs]

Resolution 600x600 dpi or 600x1200 dpi 180 lpi

Printable area Long edge: maximum 19.1 inches Short edge: maximum 318 mm

Registration tolerance < .02 inches

Product specifications

336 Chapter 15 - Specifications VarioPrint 6000 line

Other

Item Specification

Input capacity per paper module Normal trays 1 and 2: 600 sheets each

Bulk trays 3 and 4: 1,700 sheets each (or 3,400 A4/Letter sheets each when the optional dual paper trays are installed; Left- hand stack 1,800 A4/Letter sheets, right-hand stack 1,600 A4/Letter sheets)

Flex-XL trays in the Flex-XL PIM paper input module: 1,650 sheets each

Output capacity per output location Stacker: 6,000 sheets in 2 stacks of 3,000 sheets each

Finisher: Finisher tray. The finisher tray consist of 3 physical trays. You cannot address these physical trays sepa- rately as an output location. Top tray: 900 sheets (A4/Letter) Middle tray: 1,000 sheets (A4/Letter) Lower tray: 1,800 sheets (A4/Letter)

Upper output: 500 sheets (all sizes)

Supported media sizes per output lo- cation

Stacker: All media sizes between 203 mm x 203 mm and 320 mm x 488 mm When the Flex-XL PIM paper input module is installed: all media sizes between 203 mm x 203 mm and 350

mm x 500 mm Finisher:

Long edge: 10.8 - 12.04 inches Short edge: 208 mm - 220 mm

Stapling capacity Finisher: 100 sheets

Online finishing (external finisher) Via DFD2 interface

Product specifications

Chapter 15 - Specifications 337 VarioPrint 6000 line

Environmental

Specification Description

Ozone emis- sions

during printing: <= 1 mg/hr

Optimum tem- perature

17-34 C (62.6-93.2 F) For printing on light-weight media the temperature must be between 17-28 C (62.6-82.4 F).

Relative humid- ity

20-80% For printing on light-weight media the relative humidity must be between 40-70%.

Altitude Lower than 2,000 m above sea level

Room size and ventilation or air change rate at room size

Recommended room volume >= 75 m3

Recommended air change rate >= 300 m3/h

NOTE This is the ventilation requirement for the printer, additional to the standard building ventilation requirements.

Sound power level

Standby: < 69 dB(A) Print: < 84 dB(A)

Power con- sumption of the printer

Off mode: 6 W Sleep mode engine: 32 W Sleep mode controller: 44 W Standby mode: 0,9 kW Operation mode at 80 g/m / 20 lb bond: VP6180; 4.0 kW VP6220: 4,3 kW VP6270: 4,4 kW VP6330: 4,9 kW

Environmental

338 Chapter 15 - Specifications VarioPrint 6000 line

Print speed NOTE The media specifications in the following table are based on plain paper of 80 g/m or 20 lb bond.

Below you find the maximum print speeds in images per minute.

Model A4 LEF Letter LEF A3 Ledger

Two-sided

6180 182 177 97 95

6220 221 216 118 116

6270 272 266 146 143

6330 328 320 168 164

One-sided 6180 127 124 68 67

6220 127 124 68 67

6270 157 153 84 82

6330 164 160 84 82

LEF: Long-edge feed

SEF: Short-edge feed

Print speed

Chapter 15 - Specifications 339 VarioPrint 6000 line

PRISMAsync controller specifications

Item Specification

Description Embedded PRISMAsync controller.

Processor 2.9 GHz

Memory 8 GB

Hard disk 2x 500 GB

Network connectivity 10/100/1000 MB, 2x 1 Gbit Ethernet network ports

Network protocols TCP/IP; LPR/LPD socket SMB static/auto IP via DHCP SNMP v1-v3: printer MIB, private MIB, job monitoring

MIB IPP

Operating system Microsoft Windows 10

Supported Page Description Lan- guages (PDL)

APPE 5.4 (Adobe PDF Print Engine) Adobe PostScript 3 / streaming PostScript

PPML/GA Level 1 PPML versions 1.5, 2.1 and 2.2

PCL 6 (combines PCL5e and PCL XL) PDF 1.7 IPDS (option) Xerox PPP support

USB printing PDF, PS, PCL via USB connection on control panel

Supported applications VarioPrint 6000 line printer driver PRISMAprepare (6.3.1 and higher) PRISMAaccess (5.4.4 and higher) PRISMAproduction (5.04.04 and higher) PRISMAdirect (1.3.1 and higher) PRISMAspool 4.06.02 PRISMAaudit 4.10.0 VPconvert (7 and higher) Xerox FreeFlow MakeReady (7 and higher) EFI Fiery Central 1.8.2 Kodak Smartboard 5 (limited) GMC PrintNet 7.0.29 InfoPrintManager AIX 4.3

Security Common Criteria EAL2+, E-shredding, HTTPs, Firewall, PIN for DocBox, User authentication to SDS, IPv6, soft- ware protection license (integrity checker), user authenti- cation per user role: key operator, system administrator and service representative.

Features Print while RIP, streaming, multi-job processing, pre-RIP, no cycle-down between jobs, web-based configuration with Settings Editor, Remote meter reading, Remote Di- agnostics, remote software upgrade, Remote Manager. 4

PRISMAsync controller specifications

340 Chapter 15 - Specifications VarioPrint 6000 line

Item Specification

Hardware options Generic USB mouse support, Section 508 kit (video, at- tention signal), copy control device interface for pre-paid accounting, operator attention light.

PRISMAsync controller specifications

Chapter 15 - Specifications 341 VarioPrint 6000 line

Printer driver support

Printer driver Remark

PS3 UPD Microsoft Windows Server 2003/2008/2008

R2/2012 Microsoft Windows Client Vista/Windows

Server 2012 R2/Windows7/Windows8/ Windows8.1/Windows10

32 & 64-bit support

PS3 PPD - legacy Microsoft Windows & Mac/ Linux-CUPS/Other

PS3 - Macintosh (Mac OSX 10.8/10.9/10.10/10.11/Sierra)

Intel & PowerPC

PCL6 UPD Microsoft Windows Server 2003(R2)/

2008/2008 R2/2012 Microsoft Windows Client Vista/Windows

Server 2012 R2/Windows 7/Windows 8/ Windows8.1/Windows10

32 & 64-bit support

PCL6 GPD - legacy Microsoft Windows & Mac/ Linux-CUPS/Other

SAP Device Type (SAP R/3 4.6 and higher) Implementation & support via C&SS

NOTE All UPD drivers are Microsoft certified

Printer driver support

342 Chapter 15 - Specifications VarioPrint 6000 line

Index

1

1-sided printing.....................................................181

7

7" x 10" Statement Size Support........................... 25

A

Account log file Description of the data records.......................93 General information.........................................93 Name.................................................................93

Accounting Fields of the account log file........................... 93 settings..............................................................92

Add staples Finisher........................................... 311, 312, 315

Add temporary media to the Media catalog...... 258 Add toner.............................................................. 309 Advanced media setting

Setup section..................................................297 Advanced media settings............ 260, 263, 264, 265 Advanced settings

Print delivery settings....................................187 Alignment..............................................................185 Applications

Supported.......................................................340 Apply automated workflow................................... 83 Assign button........................................................249 Assign media to paper tray................................. 256 Authentication

description........................................................35 Automated workflow

(default).............................................................75 add, copy, edit..................................................77 apply from print queue....................................83 description........................................................75 hotfolder........................................................... 75 job label............................................................ 75 LPR.................................................................... 75 LPR command.................................................. 85 remote printer driver....................................... 75 restore.........................................................75, 82

Automated workflows attributes...........................................................78

B

Backup confidential data.............................................293 create...............................................................293 delete...............................................................293 USB................................................................. 293

Banner pages default media..................................................134 define.............................................................. 134 define default media......................................136

Billing counters.....................................................301 Maintenance section......................................299 Print the report............................................... 303

Binding edge.........................................................182 Brightness

darker prints................................................... 191 lighter prints................................................... 191

Bundle print jobs.................................................. 132 Bundled jobs

Change job settings....................................... 132 Business management tools............................... 317

C

Camera mounting unit........................................... 30 Capacity

Input................................................................ 337 Output............................................................. 337 Stapling...........................................................337

Certificates............................................................ 336 Change

alignment........................................................185 binding edge...................................................182 check first set..................................................195 image shift......................................................186 margin shift.................................................... 186 media.............................................................. 183 number of sets............................................... 194 offset stacking................................................ 187 output location............................................... 187 page range......................................................196 print order.......................................................187 rotation............................................................187 separator sheets.............................................198 settings for covers..........................................184 sheet order......................................................187

Index

343 VarioPrint 6000 line

sheet orientation............................................ 187 sort by page....................................................187 sort by set....................................................... 187

Change media.......................................................256 Change password...................................................59 Check

Staple cartridges............................................ 310 Toner level......................................................308

Check first set........................................................195 workflow profile............................................... 69

Check-and-print workflow profile description........................................................69

Combine print jobs...............................................132 Configuration report

Print.................................................................294 Connectivity

Default gateway............................................. 294 DNS 1.............................................................. 294 DNS 2.............................................................. 294 DNS suffix follows domain........................... 294 HTTP................................................................294 HTTPS............................................................. 294 MAC address.................................................. 294 Primary DNS suffix........................................ 294 Subnet mask...................................................294 TCP/IP..............................................................294 Test TCP/IP connection.................................. 294 WINS 1............................................................ 294 WINS 2............................................................ 294

Connectivity DHCP............................................................... 294 DNS settings...................................................294 Host name.......................................................294 IPv4 settings................................................... 294 IPv6 settings................................................... 294 Link speed and connection type................... 294 WINS settings.................................................294

Contrast decrease..........................................................191 increase...........................................................191

Control panel.......................................................... 17 access................................................................35 adjustment of readability................................ 65 brightness.........................................................65 contrast............................................................. 65 Dashboard...................................................... 239 DocBox............................................................117 error recovery transaction print jobs..............45 image shift transaction print jobs...................45 job names......................................................... 64 media catalog...................................................42 parts.................................................................. 33 transaction printing mode...............................45

Control panel settings

Setup section..................................................297 Controller

hardware options...........................................341 Counters................................................................ 301 Covers....................................................................184 Create a DocBox................................................... 142

D

Dashboard.............................................................239 Date and time........................................................295 Day counters......................................................... 301

Maintenance section......................................299 Reset................................................................302

Default gateway....................................................294 Default_ticket.jdf

use for hotfolders.............................................89 Define

finishing method............................................ 193 Define print job settings

Automated workflow..................................... 102 Control panel..................................................102 Hotfolder.........................................................102 Job ticket.........................................................102 PDL default settings....................................... 102 PDL job settings............................................. 102

Delete jobs............................................................ 206 DFD........................................................................ 337 DHCP......................................................................294 DNS 1.....................................................................294 DNS 2.....................................................................294 DNS settings......................................................... 294 DNS suffix follows domain..................................294 DocBox

Build function................................................. 158 Combine jobs................................................. 158 Create..............................................................142 description......................................................117 duplicate......................................................... 205 Interrupt function........................................... 164 Introduction.................................................... 140 Job settings.................................................... 143 Lock settings...................................................160 Move job.........................................................123 page programming........................................ 117 Print a job........................................................163 Print an urgent job......................................... 164 Split a built job............................................... 159 Split function.................................................. 159 Unlock settings...............................................161 Urgent jobs.....................................................164

DocBox job 1- or 2-sided....................................................144 Align................................................................149

Index

344 VarioPrint 6000 line

Binding............................................................153 Binding edge.................................................. 145 Brightness.......................................................153 Check first set................................................. 154 Contrast...........................................................153 Covers............................................................. 147 Edit.................................................................. 157 Job name........................................................154 Layout............................................................. 148 Margin erase...................................................153 Media.............................................................. 147 Number of sets...............................................154 Offset stacking................................................151 Output location...............................................151 Page numbering.............................................156 Print order.......................................................151 Print range...................................................... 154 Rotation...........................................................151 Sheet order.....................................................151 Sheet orientation............................................151 Shift.................................................................150 Sort by page................................................... 151 Sort by set.......................................................151 Staples............................................................ 153 Zoom...............................................................148

DocBox jobs delete...............................................................206

Double-sheet detection........................ 260, 262, 264 Disable............................................................ 262 Enable............................................................. 262

Double-sided printing.......................................... 181 Dual paper tray....................................................... 27

icon....................................................................27 Duplicate

function...........................................................205

E

E-shredding list of printed jobs.......................................... 206

EasyLift.................................................................... 24 Eject

Stack..................................................................73 Enable remote connection...................................305 Engine module........................................................18 Enhanced media mode........................ 260, 263, 264

Disable............................................................ 263 Enable............................................................. 263

Errors Job errors....................................................... 321 Machine errors....................................... 320, 323

External finisher....................................................337 Status.............................................................. 307

F

Fattening............................................................... 191 Features...........................................................16, 340 Filter

jobs..................................................................120 Find

jobs..................................................................120 Finisher....................................................................18 Finishing method..................................................193 First print time...................................................... 336 Fleet management................................................298 Flex-XL.....................................................................29 Form Assist Module............................................... 23 Forward jobs......................................................... 123

G

Grain direction...................................................... 287

H

Host name............................................................. 294 Hotfolder

configure...........................................................89 configure settings............................................ 87 create shortcut..................................................89 Drag & drop......................................................86 drag & drop files............................................ 106 drag and drop files...........................................89 General Information.........................................86 JDF ticket.......................................................... 89 Job settings...................................................... 86 Job ticket...........................................................86

HTTP...................................................................... 294 HTTPS....................................................................294

I

ICMU........................................................................30 Image adjustment

transaction printing mode...............................45 Image shift............................................................ 186

Transaction printing.......................................215 Install

operating system software............................293 PRISMAsync software................................... 293

Integrated camera mounting unit......................... 30 Intermediate check print...................................... 231

Setup section..................................................297 IPDS

output recovery..............................................225 IPv4 settings..........................................................294 IPv6 settings..........................................................294

Index

345 VarioPrint 6000 line

J

JDF ticket creation of.........................................................88 handling of media attributes...........................67 use in hotfolders.............................................. 89

JIS B5.......................................................................25 Job

change alignment.......................................... 185 change binding edge..................................... 182 change number of sets.................................. 194 change settings for covers............................ 184 change the media...........................................183 check the first set........................................... 195 Give priority....................................................130 Print later........................................................ 131 Print the job parameters................................201 Rename...........................................................197 reprint .............................................................199 separator sheets.............................................198 shift the image................................................186 shift the margin..............................................186 Ticket...............................................................201 To top..............................................................130

Job management................................................. 336 DocBox............................................................117 print queues....................................................116 transaction printing mode.......................44, 116

Job name Change............................................................197 long job name.................................................. 64 truncate.............................................................64 using shorter names........................................ 64

Job name truncation Setup section..................................................297

Job planning in job workflow.................................................43

Job preparation in job workflow.................................................43

Job selection.........................................................120 Job selection functions........................................ 123 Job settings

DocBox............................................................143 hotfolder........................................................... 86 Print job...........................................................166

Job status indicators............................................ 242 Job ticket

create JDF ticket...............................................88 Job workflow.......................................................... 43 Job-by-job workflow profile

description........................................................69 Jobs

delete...............................................................206 duplicate......................................................... 205

move............................................................... 123 search..............................................................123

Jobs view.............................................................. 123 Jobs with available media................................... 200 Jobs with label......................................................200

K

key operator settings on control panel...............................290

Key operator settings........................................... 292

L

Label...................................................................... 200 Labels

selection function...........................................116 Language

control panel.....................................................64 Setup section..................................................296

Large media.......................................................... 301 Large paper module............................................... 29 Layout

Booklet............................................................ 172 Multiple up......................................................172 Same up..........................................................172 Same-up flipped.............................................172

Licenses.................................................................293 Software..........................................................293

Light-weight media.............................................. 280 check filter.......................................................324 grain direction................................................ 287 load media......................................................281 low temperature mode.................................. 280 normal temperature mode............................ 280 replace filter....................................................325 runnability.......................................................287 unpack media................................................. 285

Link speed and connection type..........................294 Load media........................................................... 255

Schedule view................................................ 237 Local key operator settings..................................292

Setup section..................................................297 Lock settings in DocBox.......................................160 Log file

Create..............................................................294 creation of.......................................................328 download of....................................................328

Log in domain user account....................................... 53 factory defined user account...........................53 local user account............................................ 53 smart card.........................................................53

Logging................................................................. 328

Index

346 VarioPrint 6000 line

Configuration report...................................... 294 Export..............................................................294 Report file............................................... 294, 328 Software error................................................ 327 Trace file................................................. 294, 328

Low power mode....................................................48 Low temperature mode............................... 260, 264

Disable............................................................ 261 Enable............................................................. 261 light-weight media......................................... 280 Pre-printed..............................................260, 264

LPR command.........................................................85

M

MAC address.........................................................294 Maintenance

Maintenance section......................................299 tasks................................................................ 291

Maintenance section............................................ 299 Billing counters.............................................. 299 Day counters...................................................299 Maintenance...................................................299 Toner counters............................................... 299

Manual planning workflow profile description........................................................69

Margin Shift.......................................................... 186 Media

add to media catalog..................................... 257 Assign............................................................. 256 Change............................................................256 Icons................................................................250 indicators................................................ 244, 259 Information.....................................................250 Large............................................................... 301 Load.................................................................237 Output location...............................................337 Registration.................................................... 253 Standard......................................................... 301 Supported size................................................336 Supported weight.......................................... 336

Media assignment transaction printing mode...............................44

Media attributes handling in job ticket....................................... 67

Media catalog....................................................... 248 add media.......................................................257 features and benefits....................................... 42 PRISMAprepare..............................................105

Media catalogue........................................... 253, 254 Media handling

Description......................................................248 Media matching......................................................67 Media registration

Large media............273, 274, 276, 277, 278, 279 Standard-size media.... 266, 267, 269, 270, 271, 272

Media section System view................................................... 252

Media settings Advanced................................260, 263, 264, 265

Minimum line width............................................. 191 Move a job from Scheduled jobs to Waiting jobs........................................................................ 131 Move jobs..............................................................123

N

Network Connectivity....................................................340 Protocols.........................................................340

Normal temperature mode light-weight media......................................... 280

Note for operator create in job properties..................................138

Number of sets..................................................... 194 Number of staples

Used................................................................ 307

O

Offset stacking...................................................... 187 changes in the properties window............... 190 types................................................................190

Online finishing.................................................... 337 Open button.......................................................... 249 operating system software

Uninstall..........................................................293 Operator

media configuration.........................................42 Operator attention light................................. 17, 241

Status colors...................................................241 Output location

Supported media........................................... 337 Output locations

External finisher............................................... 21 Finisher............................................................. 22 Finisher upper output...................................... 22 Stacker.............................................................. 21 System output..................................................21

Output recovery....................................................225

P

Page number.........................................................109 AWF ................................................................109

Page range all pages..........................................................196 indicate the range.......................................... 196

Index

347 VarioPrint 6000 line

Paper module..........................................................18 Control panel....................................................19 Green check mark............................................ 19 Large paper.......................................................29 LEDs.................................................................. 19 Red arrows........................................................19 Unassigned button...........................................19

Paper modules........................................................19 Paper quality................................. 260, 263, 264, 265 Paper quality test..........................260, 263, 264, 265

Start.................................................................265 Stop.................................................................265

Paper tray.............................................................. 249 Dual paper tray.................................................27 indicators........................................................ 243 Media.............................................................. 256

Paper tray button location............................................................. 33

Paper tray icons.................................................... 250 Password

recovery............................................................ 61 change...............................................................59

PDF/VT................................................................... 207 records............................................................ 207

PDL Supported.......................................................340

Power modes Low power mode............................................. 48 Off......................................................................48 Ready................................................................ 48 Sleep mode.......................................................49

PPML......................................................................207 Pre-printed

Low temperature mode......................... 260, 264 Primary DNS suffix...............................................294 Print

all jobs.............................................................200 Job parameters.............................................. 201 Job settings.................................................... 201 Jobs in list of Waiting jobs............................128 jobs with available media..............................200 jobs with label................................................ 200 Urgent job.......................................................129

Print a job from USB drive...................................107 Print a scheduled job later................................... 131 Print an urgent job

DocBox............................................................164 Print delivery settings

offset stacking................................................ 187 output location............................................... 187 print order.......................................................187 rotation............................................................187 sheet order......................................................187 sheet orientation............................................ 187

sort by page....................................................187 sort by set....................................................... 187

Print job 1- or 2-sided....................................................168 Align................................................................173 Binding....................................................177, 193 Binding edge.................................................. 169 Brightness.......................................................177 Check first set................................................. 178 Color profile....................................................177 Contrast...........................................................177 Covers............................................................. 171 define finishing method................................ 193 Fattening.........................................................177 folding.............................................................193 Job name........................................................178 Job settings.................................................... 166 Line width....................................................... 177 Margin erase...................................................177 Media.............................................................. 171 Minimum line width.......................................177 Number of sets...............................................178 Offset stacking................................................175 Output location...............................................175 Page numbering.............................................180 preview........................................................... 166 Print order.......................................................175 Print range...................................................... 178 proofing.......................................................... 202 punching.........................................................193 RIP raster.........................................................177 RIP resolution................................................. 177 Rotation...........................................................175 Sheet order.....................................................175 Sheet orientation............................................175 Shift.................................................................174 Sort by page................................................... 175 Sort by set.......................................................175 Special pages......................................... 155, 179 Staples............................................................ 177 trimming......................................................... 193

Print jobs Bundle several jobs........................................132 bundling..........................................................116 convert to variable data job.......................... 208 Split bundled jobs.......................................... 132 transaction printing mode...............................44

Print production in job workflow.................................................43

Print range.............................................................196 Print settings

transaction printing mode...............................45 Print speed............................................................ 339 Print system

Index

348 VarioPrint 6000 line

language........................................................... 64 switching to transaction printing mode....... 216 transaction printing mode...............................45

Printable area........................................................336 Printed job

copy.................................................................123 Printed jobs

delete...............................................................206 E-shredding.................................................... 206 enable printing............................................... 118 printing............................................................118 removal of.......................................................206

Printer section External finisher............................................. 307 Number of used staples ............................... 307 Toner...............................................................307

Printer software Version............................................................292

Printing waiting jobs.................................................... 116

Priority for a job....................................................130 PRISMAlytics Dashboard..................................... 317 PRISMAprepare

Job preparation..............................................105 PRISMAsync

job management............................................116 job workflow.....................................................43 media assignment............................................42 media catalog...................................................42

PRISMAsync Remote Manager........................... 112 description........................................................38

PRISMAsync Remote Match description........................................................40 status indicators.............................................245

PRISMAsync software Uninstall..........................................................293

Proxy server.......................................................... 294

R

Records..........................................................207, 208 Recover password.................................................. 61 Registration...........................................................336 Registration

Media.............................................................. 253 Remote assistance................................................305 Remote connection

Remote connection enabled......................... 295 Remote connection status.............................295 Status.............................................................. 305 Test..................................................................305 Test Remote connection................................295

Remote connection enabled................................295 Remote connection status................................... 295

Remote Control description......................................................113 usage of.......................................................... 113

Remote Diagnostics............................................. 305 Remote Manager.................................................. 112

description........................................................38 start................................................................... 38

Remote Meter Reading........................................ 305 Remote printer driver...........................................104 Remote Service.....................................................305 Remote Software Upgrade.................................. 305 Remove jobs......................................................... 206 Rename

Job...................................................................197 Report file

Create..............................................................294 Reprint a job..........................................................199 Resolution............................................................. 336 Restart the system..................................................52 Restore

complete configuration................................. 293 service configuration..................................... 293 USB................................................................. 293 user configuration..........................................293

RIP raster............................................................... 191 RIP resolution........................................................191 Roll feeder............................................................... 18

S

Save the audit log files.........................................305 Schedule view

Introduction.................................................... 234 Jobs pane....................................................... 234 load media......................................................237 Media toolbar................................................. 235 Output locations pane................................... 236 Required media pane.....................................235 Streaming jobs...............................................234 Zoom control..................................................236

Schedule waiting jobs..........................................128 Scheduled jobs

change print order of..................................... 117 delete...............................................................206 move............................................................... 123 order of printing.............................................117 printing............................................................117

Search jobs..................................................................120

Security................................................................. 340 Security PIN

DocBox............................................................117 Security settings................................................... 292 Select

Index

349 VarioPrint 6000 line

jobs..................................................................120 Select

different media for job...................................183 Selection function

list of waiting jobs..........................................116 Separator sheets...................................................198

configure orientation..................................... 136 define default media......................................136

Serial number....................................................... 292 Settings Editor........................................................ 36

Access............................................................... 37 Access via control panel................................292 accounting settings..........................................92 Change settings..............................................292 enable list of printed jobs..............................118 settings on control panel...............................290 transaction printing setups............................. 45 View settings.................................................. 292

Setup section........................................................ 296 Advanced media settings.............................. 297 Control panel settings....................................297 Intermediate check print................................297 Job name truncation......................................297 Language........................................................ 296 Local key operator settings........................... 297 Shut down system......................................... 297 Warning time..................................................296 Workflow.........................................................296 Workflow profile.............................................296

Shut down system Setup section..................................................297

Shut down the system........................................... 51 Sleep button............................................................48

location............................................................. 33 Sleep mode............................................................. 49 Software

upgrade...........................................................292 Software

Licenses.......................................................... 293 Software error

Logging...........................................................327 Software updates

status indicators.............................................244 Special pages

configure.........................................................134 Specifications

environmental................................................ 338 PRISMAsync controller..................................340 product............................................................336

Speed.....................................................................339 Split print jobs...................................................... 132 Stacker.....................................................................18 Standard media.................................................... 301 Standard workflow profile

description........................................................68 Staple

Status.............................................................. 310 Staple cartridges...................................................310 Stapler icons......................................................... 310 Staples

Finisher........................................... 311, 312, 315 Stapling

Capacity.......................................................... 337 Status.....................................................................239 Status indicators

PRISMAsync Remote Match......................... 245 software updates............................................244

Status LED location............................................................. 33

Stop behavior stop after a job............................................... 203 stop after a set................................................203 stop as soon as possible............................... 203

Stop button location............................................................. 33

Stop the printer after a job........................................................203 after a set........................................................ 203 as soon as possible........................................203 manually......................................................... 203

Subnet mask......................................................... 294 System

Restart...............................................................52 Shut down........................................................ 51 Turn on..............................................................50

system administrator media configuration.........................................42

System administrator settings............................ 292 System components

Control panel....................................................17 Engine module................................................. 18 Finisher............................................................. 18 Operator attention light................................... 17 Paper module................................................... 18 Roll feeder.........................................................18 Stacker.............................................................. 18

System configuration tasks................................................................ 290

System of measurement......................................295 System recovery...................................................292 System settings

Date and time................................................. 295 System of measurement............................... 295 Time zone....................................................... 295

System view Maintenance section......................................299 Media section................................................. 252 Printer section................................................ 307

Index

350 VarioPrint 6000 line

Setup section..................................................296 transaction section.........................................210

T

Task splitting media configuration.........................................42

TCP/IP.................................................................... 294 Technology........................................................... 336 Temporary media......................... 248, 253, 254, 258 Test Remote connection.............................. 295, 305 Test TCP/IP connection........................................ 294 Ticket..................................................................... 201 Time zone..............................................................295 To top.................................................................... 130 Toner............................................................. 309, 336

Filling level..............................................307, 308 Icon..................................................................308 Level................................................................308

Toner counter....................................................... 301 Toner counters

Maintenance section......................................299 Toner indicator

Status bar........................................................309 Toner icon.......................................................309

Toner pollution problems.................................... 321 Trace file

Create..............................................................294 Trailer pages

configure default media................................ 136 default media..................................................135 define.............................................................. 135

Transaction printing............................................. 210 Activate........................................................... 213 Deactivate....................................................... 214 Image shift......................................................215 media messages............................................ 228 Printer offline..................................................214 Printer online..................................................213

Transaction printing mode activating........................................................ 216 configuration.................................................... 45 description........................................................44 image adjustment............................................ 45 job management............................................116 secure error recovery.......................................45

Transaction setup activate............................................................220 create new...................................................... 218 edit...................................................................219 export..............................................................221 import..............................................................221 restore.............................................................221 validate............................................................222

validate all transaction setups...................... 223 Tray

Load media.....................................................255 Tray mapping

transaction printing mode...............................44 Tray-to-media mapping

validation report.............................................222 Tray-to-tray mapping

validation report.............................................222 Trays view

Overview.........................................................249 Troubleshooting................................................... 320

light-weight media......................................... 323 Truncate

job name...........................................................64 Turn on the system................................................ 50

U

Unattended workflow profile description........................................................70

Uninstall operating system software............................293 PRISMAsync software................................... 293

Unlock settings in DocBox...................................161 Urgent job............................................................. 129 Urgent jobs

DocBox............................................................164 USB drive

Print job...........................................................107 Save a file to another location...................... 107

USB port location............................................................. 33

User authentication description........................................................35

Username................................................................33

V

Validation report transaction setup in tray-to-media mode.....222 transaction setup in tray-to-tray mode.........222

Variable data printing...........................................207 convert from normal job............................... 208

VDP................................................................ 207, 208 Version

Printer software..............................................292

W

Waiting jobs delete...............................................................206 duplicate......................................................... 205 move............................................................... 123 printing............................................................116

Index

351 VarioPrint 6000 line

Warm-up time.......................................................336 Warning time

configuration.................................................... 64 Setup section..................................................296

WINS 1...................................................................294 WINS 2...................................................................294 WINS settings....................................................... 294 Workflow

Setup section..................................................296 Workflow profiles

Function............................................................ 68

Z

Zoom Fit to page.......................................................172 Percentage......................................................172

Index

352 VarioPrint 6000 line

Canon In

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the varioPRINT Canon works, you can view and download the Canon varioPRINT 6220 Operation Guide on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the Operation Guide for Canon varioPRINT as well as other Canon manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The Operation Guide should include all the details that are needed to use a Canon varioPRINT. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the Canon varioPRINT 6220 Operation Guide is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This Canon varioPRINT 6220 Operation Guide consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download Canon varioPRINT 6220 Operation Guide free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print Canon varioPRINT 6220 Operation Guide, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Canon varioPRINT 6220 Operation Guide as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.